You are on page 1of 286

FNC-570-0052-000

PRACTICES UNIT DESCRIPTIONS


Application Engineering
Cable and Wiring Guide
Circuit Breaker Panel
Engineering and Installation
Fiber Cable Handling
General Description
Maintenance and Trouble
Clearing
FLASH-192
Migrations
RELEASE 5.2
Ordering Information
ISSUE 3, MARCH 2005
Plug-In Unit Installation
Shelf Installation COMPATIBLE WITH:
System Operations • FLEXR® GT 3.4
System Turn-Up Non-Ring • NETSMART® 1500 Rel. 2.0
Configurations
System Turn-Up Ring
Configurations
TL1 Commands
➤ Unit Descriptions
Upgrades and Service
Modifications

FUJITSU NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS INC.


Copyrights, Trademarks, and Disclaimers

FLASH® is a trademark of Fujitsu Network Communications NETSMART® is a trademark of Fujitsu Network


Inc. (USA). All Rights Reserved Communications Inc. (USA). All Rights Reserved
FLASHWAVE® is a trademark of Fujitsu Network LEAF® is a registered trademark of Corning Incorporated.
Communications Inc. (USA). All Rights Reserved
TrueWave® is a registered trademark of Fitel USA Corp.
FLEXR® is a trademark of Fujitsu Network Communications
Inc. (USA). All Rights Reserved

All other products or services mentioned in this document are identified by the trademarks, service marks, or product names as
designated by the companies that market those products or services or own those marks. Inquiries concerning such products,
services, or marks should be made directly to those companies.

This document and its contents are provided by Fujitsu Network Communications Inc. (FNC) for guidance purposes only. This
document is provided “as is” with no warranties or representations whatsoever, either express or implied, including without
limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for purpose. FNC does not warrant or represent that the
contents of this document are error free. Furthermore, the contents of this document are subject to update and change at any
time without notice by FNC, since FNC reserves the right, without notice, to make changes in equipment design or
components as progress in engineering methods may warrant. No part of the contents of this document may be copied,
modified, or otherwise reproduced without the express written consent of FNC.

Unpublished work and only distributed under restriction.


Copyright © Fujitsu Network Communications Inc. All Rights Reserved.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Compliance

COMPLIANCE
FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A digital devices, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interferences when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
energy and if not installed in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, which
the user will be required to correct at his/her expense.

Industry Canada

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas la Classe UNE
for noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the limites pour les émissions de bruit de la série d'appareil
Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian numérique hors dans les Règlements d'Intervention de
Department of Communications to ICES-003. Radio du Département Canadien de Communications
aux NMB-003.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Fujitsu Network Communications Inc. Richardson, Texas

CE Certification
The FLASH®-192 System complies with the following compatibility standards and directives to carry CE markings:
• ETSI 300 386-2
• EMC directive 89/336/EEC
• EN 60950 (safety of information equipment)
• EN 60825 (safety of LASER products)

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
Admonishments

IMPORTANT
Observe all warnings in the text or on equipment labels regarding high-voltage or high-temperature conditions.
The following warnings and figures apply to most Fujitsu products.

Plug-In Unit Cautions

Observe the following precautions when handling plug-in units:


• Hold the plug-in unit only by its edges.
• Slowly and firmly push a plug-in unit into its slot to avoid damaging the unit. Do not force the unit. A
slow insertion method minimizes power surges during installation. The longer ground connector pins
ensure the ground circuit is connected first.

ESD Cautions

Units are stamped with anti-electrostatic markings (shown at right). Observe the ATTENTION
following precautions to avoid damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD): OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS
• Always transport and store the unit in an ESD approved FOR HANDLING

shipping bag. ELECTROSTATIC


SENSITIVE
• Always wear an ESD wrist strap, with a minimum 1-megohm DEVICE
resistance, that is connected to safety ground. Do not use a
damaged wrist strap. Anti-Electrostatic Markings

Fiber Warnings Avertissements de Fibre

Danger: Invisible laser radiation. Avoid La Danger: Le rayonnement laser Invisible.


direct exposure to the beam. Never DANGER Eviter l'exposition directe au rayon. Jamais le
look into the end of a fiber, fiber cord, regard dans la fin d'une fibre, une corde de fibre,
or fiber pigtail. Permanent eye damage Invisible laser ou la natte de fibre. Les dommages permanent
or blindness can occur quickly when radiation from d'oeil ou la cécité peut arriver rapidement
laser radiation is present. The label on connectors quand le rayonnement laser est actuel.
the right is attached to laser-emitting when
and receiving units as a reminder. Use La Prudence: L'Usage de contrôles ou
uncoupled
of controls, adjustments, or procedures d'ajustements ou l'exécution ou les procédures
AVOID DIRECT
other than those specified may result autrement que ces spécifié en ceci ont pour
EXPOSURE
in hazardous laser radiation exposure. résultat l'exposition de rayonnement
TO BEAM
hasardeuse.
Danger: Never handle exposed fiber
with your bare hands or touch it to your Laser Radiation Label
La Danger: Jamais la poignée a exposé la fibre
body. Fiber fragments can enter the avec vos mains nues ou le touche à votre corps.
skin and are difficult to detect and Les fragments de fibre peut entrer la peau et
remove. sont difficiles de détecter et enlever.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Admonishments

Installation Restrictions Restrictions d'Installation

Systems shall be installed only in restricted access Les systèmes seront seulement installés dans les secteurs
areas (for example, dedicated equipment rooms or d'accès limités (par exemple, les pièces d'équipement
equipment closets) in accordance with the National dédié ou les placards d'équipement) conformément au
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. Code Electrique National, ANSI/NFPA 70.

Care should be taken not to compromise the stability Le soin devrait être pris pour ne pas compromettre la
of the rack by the installation of this equipment. stabilité de l'étagère par l'installation de cet équipement.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
Document Change Notice

DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE


This notice lists the reasons for, location of, and a description of document changes. When the changes are
extensive, a general statement giving the nature of the revisions is provided.

Reason for Document Change: Updated functional description for switching unit SWR1

Location of Change Description of Change

Section 28.4.1, Drop Direction Traffic Updated functional description for switching unit SWR1.
[p. 28-3]

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
Table of Contents

1
Introduction 1.1 Overview of Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2 Unit Simplified Block Diagram Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2
OC-3 Interface (3xx1) 2.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Unit Description
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.3 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.5 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

3
Alarm/Orderwire 3.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
(AWU1)
Unit Description 3.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.3 Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
Table of Contents

3.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) 4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Unit Description
4.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

5
OC-48 Interface (C8x1) 5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Unit Description
5.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6
Microprocessor 6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
(CPU1)
Unit Description 6.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


ii Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Table of Contents

6.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

6.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

7
Craft Interface (CRF1) 7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Unit Description
7.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

7.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

8
Data Communications 8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Channel (DCC1)
Unit Description 8.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

8.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions iii
Table of Contents

9
Dispersion 9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Compensation (DCMx)
Unit Description 9.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.4 Functional Description and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

9.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9.6 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

10
10-Gb/s 10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Demultiplexer (DMR1/
DMS1/DMS2) 10.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Unit Description
10.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

10.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

11
Fan (FAN1/FAN3) 11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Unit Description
11.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


iv Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Table of Contents

12
Fan (FAN2/FAN4) 12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Unit Description
12.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

12.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

13
Overhead Processing 13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
(HED1/HED2)
Unit Description 13.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

13.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

13.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

13.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

14
Overhead Processing 14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
(HED3)
Unit Description 14.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

14.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

14.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

14.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions v
Table of Contents

15
HUBR (HUB4) 15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Unit Description
15.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

15.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

15.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

15.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

16
HUBx Unit Description 16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

16.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

16.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

16.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

16.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5

16.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5

17
Flash Memory (MEM1) 17.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Unit Description
17.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

17.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


vi Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Table of Contents

18
OC-48 Interface 18.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
(MMx1/MSxn/MMnn)
Unit Description 18.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5

18.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5

18.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5

18.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10

18.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11

19
OC-48/OC-48c 19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Interface
(MMx5/MSx5) 19.2 Unit Optical Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
Unit Description
19.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3

19.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4

19.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4

19.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8

19.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9

20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer 20.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
(MXR1, MXS1, MXS2)
Unit Description 20.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

20.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3

20.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4

20.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions vii
Table of Contents

20.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7

21
OC-48 Interface 21.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
(NFR1)
Unit Description 21.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

21.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

21.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

21.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

21.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4

22
Power (PWR1) 22.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Unit Description
22.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

22.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2

22.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

22.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4

22.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4

23
OC-192 Receiver 23.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
(RCxn)
Unit Description 23.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

23.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

23.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


viii Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Table of Contents

23.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

23.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

24
OC-192 Receiver 24.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
(RSU2)
Unit Description 24.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

24.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2

24.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3

24.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4

24.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4

25
RCWA (RCA1) Receiver 25.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Unit Description
25.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2

25.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3

25.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3

25.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4

25.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4

25.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5

26
RxWn Receiver 26.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
Unit Description
26.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions ix
Table of Contents

26.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3

26.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4

26.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

26.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

26.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7

27
Synchronization 27.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
Control (SCU1)
Unit Description 27.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2

27.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3

27.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3

27.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6

27.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6

28
Switching (SWR1) 28.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
Unit Description
28.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2

28.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3

28.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3

28.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4

28.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


x Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Table of Contents

29
TAU5 Unit Description 29.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2

29.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2

29.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2

29.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2

29.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4

29.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4

30
TAxn Unit Description 30.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2

30.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2

30.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3

30.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3

30.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4

30.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4

31
Routing Shelf 31.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
Synchronization
(TCR1) 31.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
Unit Description
31.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2

31.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3

31.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4

31.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions xi
Table of Contents

32
OC-192 Transmitter 32.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
(TSxn/TCxn)
Unit Description 32.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3

32.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3

32.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3

32.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5

32.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5

33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn 33.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
Unit Description
33.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5

33.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5

33.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6

33.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7

33.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8

33.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8

34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) 34.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
Narrowband Tunable
Transmitter 34.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
Unit Description
34.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5

34.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6

34.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


xii Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Table of Contents

34.6 Using In-Line Optical Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-8

34.7 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-8

34.8 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-9

Index

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions xiii
1
CHAPTERS INTRODUCTION
➤ 1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 1.1 Overview of Practice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 1.2 Unit Simplified Block Diagram Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
8 DCC1
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview of Practice

1.1 Overview of Practice


This practice provides detailed descriptions of the plug-in units used in the FLASH®-192
system. Each of the remaining chapters in this practice describes a plug-in unit and contains
the following information about each.
■ General description (overview)

Unit versions
■ Cross-references for additional unit information such as:
• Compatibility
• Order information
• Optical specifications
• Installation and removal procedures
• Optical connector locations
• Replacement procedures
• Optical power measurement procedures
• Trouble-clearing procedures
■ Features
■ Options
■ Functional descriptions, including, as applicable:
• Office alarms
• Lamp test
• Abnormal condition indicators
• Orderwire
• Housekeeping
• Communication link
• Receiver direction
• Transmitter direction
• Monitor and control

Unit power consumption
■ Physical description
■ Physical dimensions

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


1-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview of Practice


Front-panel description
■ LED indicators, including
• LED name
• Color
• Condition for activation
• Condition for deactivation

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 1-3
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Unit Simplified Block Diagram Legend

1.2 Unit Simplified Block Diagram Legend


Figure 1-1 [p. 1-4] defines common symbols used in the simplified block diagrams shown in
the following chapters.

Figure 1-1: Common Symbols Used in Simplified Block Diagrams

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


1-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
2
CHAPTERS OC-3 INTERFACE (3XX1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
➤ 2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
8 DCC1
2.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 2.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 2.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
13 HED1/HED2
2.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 2.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 2
OC-3 Interface (3xx1) Unit Description
Overview

2.1 Overview
The OC-3 Interface (3xx1) units serve as an OC-3 tributary interface for FLASH®-192
equipment and, through the Management Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf, provide
protection switching for network applications. Each unit can handle any combination of
STS-1 and STS-3c signals, up to a maximum total bandwidth of three STS-1 channels. Paired
3xx1 units support both working and protection traffic in many network applications.

Table 2-1 [p. 2-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 2-1: 3xx1 Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

3Lx1a FC95113Lx1 OC-3 transceiver (IR/LR)

3Sx1a FC95113Sx1 OC-3 transceiver (SR)


a
The “x” indicates optical connector type: F=FC, S=SC, T=ST.

Table 2-2 [p. 2-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 2-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing,


Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing,


procedures Chapter 7

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


2-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 2
OC-3 Interface (3xx1) Unit Description
Features

2.2 Features
The 3xx1 unit provides the following features:
■ OC-3 tributary interfaces

Line protection switching
■ Pointer processing

2.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the 3xx1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 20 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

2.4 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the OC-3 Interface (3xx1)
plug-in unit.

2.4.1 Receive Direction (Incoming OC-3 Tributary Signal)


The incoming OC-3 tributary signal is converted to a serial electrical signal and then
processed by the OC-3 interface section, where framing is located and loss of frame (LOF)
and loss of signal (LOS) are monitored. The overhead is accessed and signal fail (SF) and
signal degrade (SD) conditions are monitored. The overhead is passed to the Management
Complex. The signal is then pointer processed to allow alignment with the system master
clock. Finally, the signal is passed through the OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn) units
(colocated in the Optical Tributary shelf ) to the Routing shelf for distribution.

2.4.2 Transmit Direction (Outgoing OC-3 Signal)


In a 1+1 system configuration, selection of traffic groups under control of the Management
Complex (located in the OC-192 Transport shelf ) provides line protection and the
underlying configuration for facility protection. Traffic from the MMx1 units is selected by
the 1+1 selection section of the 3xx1 for processing within the 3xx1. The selected traffic from
the MMx1/MSxn units is passed through the STS-3 pointer processor, where it is
synchronized to the system master clock.

After pointer processing, SONET overhead is added to the signal. The


time-slot assignment (TSA) processing in the Routing shelf diverts selected STS channels to
be dropped to the OC-3 facility.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 2-3
CHAPTER 2
OC-3 Interface (3xx1) Unit Description
Options

Finally, the signal is converted to a serial data stream, electrical-to-optical (E/O) conversion
takes place, and the signal is transmitted over the OC-3 tributary.

2.4.3 Monitor and Control


Optical Tributary shelf functions are managed from the Management Complex, which is part
of the OC-192 Transport shelf. The two shelves are linked by an HUBx/HEDx optical
connection. In the 3xx1 unit, a control interface section (unit control) is provided for
communication between the Management Complex and various sections within the 3xx1
unit. This control interface reports circuit and signal failures/degrades to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

2.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit.
Table 2-3 [p. 2-4] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 2-3: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


3Lx1 14.3 14.5

3Sx1 14.1 14.3

2.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the 3xx1 units are set during provisioning and are stored
in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any optioning
activities when replacing a 3xx1 unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring
Configurations, Appendix A.

2.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 2-1 [p. 2-5] shows the front panel of the 3xx1 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


2-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 2
OC-3 Interface (3xx1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/
SVCE

LINE2
LINE1

Iss. 01
m1371.fh8_1

Figure 2-1: 3xx1 Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 2-5
CHAPTER 2
OC-3 Interface (3xx1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 2-4 [p. 2-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 2-4: 3xx1 Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation


FAIL/SVCE Red Laser alarm No failure
Equipment failure
DC-DC conversion failure
Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match
Green In service—active In service—standby
Yellow Polling cell error No error
Lamp test No lamp test
Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK
yellow
L1 Red LOS: Tributary side No alarm
LOF: Tributary side
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Lb (See Caution footnote.)
Yellow APSB No alarm
APSCM
APSMM
FEP
AIS-L: Tributary side
DCCFAIL
Lamp test No lamp test
L2 Red LOS: Tributary side No alarm
LOF: Tributary side
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Lb
Yellow APSB No alarm
APSCM
APSMM
FEP
AIS-L: Tributary side
DCCFAIL
Lamp test No lamp test
a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b
Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream site
relative to this unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


2-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
3
CHAPTERS ALARM/ORDERWIRE (AWU1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
➤ 3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
8 DCC1
3.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 3.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 3.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
13 HED1/HED2
3.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 3.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Overview

3.1 Overview
The FLASH®-192 Alarm and Orderwire Unit (AWU1) provides the circuitry for office alarm
interfaces, orderwire connection, and the interface for site housekeeping alarms and controls.
In a sense, it is the “human interface” to the system because it is the first point of system and
network alarms notification to the technicians at the site. This unit also provides control over
the audible office alarms and system lamp test. The part number for this unit is
FC9511AWU1.

Table 3-1 [p. 3-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 3-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Housekeeping functions FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 6.9 [p. 6-27]

Orderwire functions FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 6.10 [p. 6-29]

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

3.2 Features
The AWU1 provides the following:
■ Office alarm interface
■ Orderwire interface
■ Housekeeping (environmental) alarm/control interface
(16 inputs and 4 control outputs)
■ Lamp test switch
■ Office battery status LEDs

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


3-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

3.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the AWU1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 22 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

3.4 Functional Description


Figure 3-1 [p. 3-4] is a simplified block diagram of the AWU1.

3.4.1 Office Alarms


Audible and visual office alarm notifications are activated by signals from the Management
Complex central processing unit(s) (CPU). The AWU1 CPU then activates the appropriate
critical (CR), major (MAJ), and minor (MIN) visual and audible alarm relays and the
corresponding LEDs on the front panel.

Pressing the alarm cut-off (ACO) button on the front of the unit deactivates the audible alarm
output relays and the ACO LED. This cut-off continues until the current alarm state changes,
at which time the new status is indicated on all the audible alarm relay outputs, visual alarm
relay outputs, and the front-panel LEDs.

3.4.2 Lamp Test


A LAMP TEST control is provided to allow the technician to test the system LEDs. When
pressed, multicolor LEDs (red, yellow, green) light in the yellow state. Single-color LEDs light
in their designated color.

3.4.3 Abnormal Condition Indicator


The following manual control conditions cause the ABN (abnormal) LED to light yellow on
the AWU1.
■ Forced switch

Lockout

Loopback

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 3-3
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Functional Description

E1 X 10
HEDx E2 X 1 (Future)
ORDERWIRE BRIDGE PHONE
A/D D/A CONVERSION ACCESS
VF1 (E1) (4W)
LOCAL OW
VF2 (E2) (4W)
EXPRESS OW
MANAGEMENT CR
COMPLEX
BUS
CALL
OW CALL RELAY
(See Note 2)
MJ
AUDIBLE CR RELAY

AUDIBLE MAJ RELAY

AUDIBLE MIN RELAY MN

VISUAL CR RELAY

VISUAL MAJ RELAY


ABN
VISUAL MIN RELAY

IN
1 CPU
SOLID-STATE RELAY Interface
OUT ACO
HK ALM

IN
16 SOLID-STATE RELAY
OUT CALL

1 RELAY

2 RELAY
HK
CONTROL 3 FAIL/SVCE
RELAY

4 RELAY

UNIT FAIL
(1-9) MC ACO LAMP
(See Note 1) TST PWR-A

OFF -48 PWR-B


BATT VDC

B
d6755.fh8_6

Note 1: ACO function operates via the MANAGEMENT COMPLEX BUS to/from CPU1 unit.
Note 2: Remote call indicator tone is customer-supplied.

Figure 3-1: AWU1 Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


3-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Functional Description

3.4.4 Management Complex Failure Indicator


Eight DC alarm lines from the units in the Management Complex are connected to the
AWU1 unit to detect hard failures of management units.

3.4.5 Orderwire
Note: Orderwire is supported in Releases 2.3, 4.2, 5.1, and 5.2.

The orderwire feature is available with all FLASH-192 configurations. The AWU1 passes E1
(local) and E2 (express) bytes received from the SONET line interfaces overhead to the
orderwire conversion circuitry. These bytes then can be chosen for connection to the
rear-panel connectors and/or for digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion to voice frequency (VF)
for the telephone interface on the front panel and/or rear connector. Similarly, analog VF
signals from the VF1 and VF2 connections on the rear panel and/or the telephone interface
on the front panel are passed through the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter and converted to
digital signals.

Note: Release 5.2 software supports the E1 and E2 channels.

For additional details and specifications for orderwire functionality, refer to


FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 6.10 [p. 6-29].

3.4.6 Housekeeping
Note: Housekeeping functions are supported in Releases 2.3, 4.2, 5.1, and 5.2.

The housekeeping feature is available with all FLASH-192 configurations. Sixteen


housekeeping alarm inputs are accepted from local external equipment. A change of state on
one of these inputs informs the AWU1 of an alarm condition status change for the associated
external equipment. This information is passed to the Management Complex CPU. Likewise,
the Management Complex CPU controls activation of the four housekeeping control relays
on the AWU1.

For additional details and specifications for housekeeping functionality, refer to


FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 6.9 [p. 6-27].

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 3-5
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Options

3.4.7 Unit Power


This unit is powered by the PWR1 power converter in the Transport shelf. The typical and
maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:

Typical: 5.6 watts
■ Maximum: 8.0 watts

3.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the AWU1 are set during system-level provisioning and
are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing an AWU1.

3.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 3-2 [p. 3-7] shows the front panel of the AWU1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


3-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

CR

MJ

MN

ABN

PWR
A
PWR
B

FAIL/SVCE

ACO

CALL

ACO

PHONE

LAMP
TST
AWU1
d7032

Figure 3-2: AWU1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 3-7
CHAPTER 3
Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 3-2 [p. 3-8] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 3-2: AWU1 Unit LED Indicators

Condition for
Name Color Condition for Deactivation
Activation
PWR A Green Normal: A: –48 V DC on A: –48 V DC off
Lamp testa No lamp test

PWR B Green Normal: B: –48 V DC on B: –48 V DC off


Lamp testb No lamp test

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment alarm Normal operation


DC–DC converter fail

Blinking Equipment mismatchc Installed units match unit provisioning


red

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

CR Red Critical alarm (system) No CR alarm


Lamp test No lamp test

MJ Red Major alarm (system) No MJ alarm


Lamp test No lamp test

MN Yellow Minor alarm (system) No MN alarm


Lamp test No lamp test

ABN Yellow Forced switch No abnormal condition


Lockout
Loopback
Lamp test No lamp test

ACO Green ACO–active New alarm/normal


Lamp test No lamp test

CALL Green Orderwire call No call


Lamp test No lamp test
a Does not light if office battery feed A is not present.
b Does not light if office battery feed B is not present.
c Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


3-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
4
CHAPTERS OC-12 INTERFACE (C2X1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
➤ 4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
8 DCC1
4.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 4.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 4.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
13 HED1/HED2
4.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 4.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) Unit Description
Overview

4.1 Overview
The OC-12 Interface (C2x1) units serve as the OC-12 tributary interfaces for FLASH®-192
equipment and, through the Management Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf, provide
protection switching for network applications. Each unit can handle any combination of
STS-1, STS-3c, and STS-12c signals up to a maximum total bandwidth of 12 STS-1
channels. Paired C2x1 units support both working and protection traffic in many network
applications.

Table 4-1 [p. 4-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 4-1: C2x1 Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

C2F1 FC9511C2F1 OC-12 transceiver with FC connectors

C2S1 FC9511C2S1 OC-12 transceiver with SC connectors

C2T1 FC9511C2T1 OC-12 transceiver with ST connectors

Table 4-2 [p. 4-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 4-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


4-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) Unit Description
Features

4.2 Features
The C2x1 unit provides the following features:
■ OC-12 tributary interfaces

Line protection switching
■ Pointer processing

OC-12 loopback using software control

4.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the C2x1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 20 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

4.4 Functional Description


Figure 4-1 [p. 4-4] is a simplified block diagram of the C2x1 unit.

4.4.1 Receive Direction (Incoming OC-12 Tributary Signal)


The incoming OC-12 tributary signal is converted to a serial electrical signal and then
processed by the OC-12 interface section, where framing is located and loss of frame (LOF)
and loss of signal (LOS) are monitored. The overhead is accessed and signal fail (SF) and
signal degrade (SD) conditions are monitored. The overhead is passed to the Management
Complex. The signal is then pointer processed to allow alignment with the system master
clock. Finally, the signal is passed to the OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSx2) units (collocated in
the Optical Tributary shelf ) for transport.

4.4.2 Transmit Direction (Outgoing OC-12 Signal)


In a 1+1 system configuration, selection of traffic groups under control of the Management
Complex (located in the OC-192 Transport shelf ) provides line protection and the
underlying configuration for facility protection. Traffic from the MMx1 units is selected by
the 1+1 selection section of the C2x1 for processing within the C2x1. The selected traffic
from the OC-48 Interface unit is passed through the STS-12 pointer processor, where it is
synchronized to the system master clock.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 4-3
CHAPTER 4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) Unit Description
Functional Description

From To
Selection Pointer MMx1
MMx1 Distribution
(1+1 only) Processing Unit(s)
Units

Overhead Data
(to HUBx) OC-12 Overhead OC-12 Overhead
Overhead Data Processing Processing
(from HUBx)

OC-12
Parallel
Framing and
to
Serial to
Serial
Parallel

Optical Electrical
to to
Electrical Optical

OC-12 OC-12
Optical Optical
System Input Output
To
Clock Circuitry
To Circuitry ON LINE-R

ON LINE-S
Management Unit
Complex Control LINE
Interface
(HUBx)
FAIL/SVCE

PWR A
d7761.fh8_3

Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 4-1: C2x1 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

After pointer processing, SONET overhead is added to the signal. The time-slot assignment
(TSA) section in the OC-192 Transport shelf diverts selected STS channels to be dropped to
the OC-12 facility.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


4-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) Unit Description
Options

Finally, the signal is converted to a serial data stream, electrical-to-optical conversion takes
place, and the signal is transmitted over the OC-12 tributary.

4.4.3 Monitor and Control


Optical Tributary shelf functions are managed from the Management Complex, which is part
of the OC-192 Transport shelf. The two shelves are linked by a HUB unit/HED unit optical
connection. In the C2x1 unit, a control interface section (unit control) is provided for
communication between the Management Complex and various sections within the C2x1
unit. This control interface reports circuit and signal failures/degrades to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

4.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 17.0 watts
■ Maximum: 35.0 watts

4.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the C2x1 units are set during provisioning and are
stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing a C2x1 unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A.

4.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 4-2 [p. 4-6] shows the front panel of the C2x1 unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 4-5
CHAPTER 4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

DANGER
LASER

FAIL/SVCE

LINE

ON LINE-S

ON LINE-R
C2x1

d7760.2

Figure 4-2: C2x1 Unit Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


4-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 4
OC-12 Interface (C2x1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 4-3 [p. 4-7] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 4-3: C2x1 Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Laser alarm No failure


Equipment failure
DC-DC conversion failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Polling cell error No error

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow

LINE Red LOS: Tributary side No alarm


LOF: Tributary side
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Lb (See Caution footnote.)

Yellow APSB No alarm


APSCM
APSMM
FEP
AIS-L: Tributary side
DCCFAIL

Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE S Green Tributary send side active Tributary send side inactive

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE R Green Tributary receive side active Tributary receive side inactive

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test


a “Equipment mismatch” indicates that the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b
Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream site
relative to this unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 4-7
5
CHAPTERS OC-48 INTERFACE (C8X1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
➤ 5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
8 DCC1
5.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 5.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 5.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
13 HED1/HED2
5.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 5.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 5
OC-48 Interface (C8x1) Unit Description
Overview

5.1 Overview
The OC-48 Interface (C8x1) units serve as the OC-48 tributary interfaces for FLASH®-192
equipment when equipped with a routing shelf. The C8x1 unit, through the Management
Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf, provides protection switching for network
applications. Each unit can handle any combination of STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, and
STS-48c signals, up to a maximum total bandwidth of 48 STS-1 channels. Paired C8x1 units
support both working and protection traffic in many network applications.

Table 5-1 [p. 5-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 5-1: C8x1 Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

C8F1 FC9511C8F1 OC-48 transceiver with FC connectors

C8S1 FC9511C8S1 OC-48 transceiver with SC connectors

C8T1 FC9511C8T1 OC-48 transceiver with ST connectors

Table 5-2 [p. 5-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 5-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


5-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 5
OC-48 Interface (C8x1) Unit Description
Features

5.2 Features
The C8x1 unit provides the following features:
■ OC-48 tributary interfaces

Line protection switching
■ Pointer processing

5.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the C8x1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 44 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

5.4 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the OC-48 Interface (C8x1)
units.

5.4.1 Receive Direction (Incoming OC-48 Tributary Signal)


The incoming OC-48 tributary signal is converted to a serial electrical signal and then
processed by the OC-48 interface section, where framing is located and loss of frame (LOF)
and loss of signal (LOS) are monitored. The overhead is accessed and signal fail (SF) and
signal degrade (SD) conditions are monitored. The overhead is passed to the Management
Complex. The signal is then pointer processed to allow alignment with the system master
clock. Finally, the signal is passed through the OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn) units
(colocated in the Optical Tributary shelf ) to the Routing shelf for distribution.

5.4.2 Transmit Direction (Outgoing OC-48 Signal)


In a 1+1 system configuration, selection of traffic groups under control of the Management
Complex (located in the OC-192 Transport shelf ) provides line protection and the
underlying configuration for facility protection. Traffic from the MMx1/MSxn units is
selected by the 1+1 selection section of the C8x1 for processing within the C8x1. The selected
traffic from the MMx1/MSxn units is passed through the STS-48 pointer processor, where it
is synchronized to the system master clock.

After pointer processing, SONET overhead is added to the signal. Time-slot-assignment


(TSA) processing in the Routing shelf diverts selected STS channels to be dropped to the
OC-48 facility.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 5-3
CHAPTER 5
OC-48 Interface (C8x1) Unit Description
Options

Finally, the signal is converted to a serial data stream, electrical-to-optical conversion takes
place, and the signal is transmitted over the OC-48 tributary.

5.4.3 Monitor and Control


Optical Tributary shelf functions are managed from the Management Complex, which is part
of the OC-192 Transport shelf. The two shelves are linked by an HUBx/HEDx optical
connection. In the C8x1 unit, a control interface section (unit control) is provided for
communication between the Management Complex and various sections within the C8x1
unit. This control interface reports circuit and signal failures/degrades to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

5.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 36.0 watts
■ Maximum: 70.0 watts

5.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the C8x1 units are set during provisioning and are
stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing a C8x1 unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A.

5.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 5-1 [p. 5-5] shows the front panel of the C8x1 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


5-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 5
OC-48 Interface (C8x1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE
LINE

ON LINE S
ON LINE R
m0963

Figure 5-1: C8x1 Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 5-5
CHAPTER 5
OC-48 Interface (C8x1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 5-3 [p. 5-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 5-3: C8x1 Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation


FAIL/SVCE Red Laser alarm No failure
Equipment failure
DC-DC conversion failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Polling cell error No error

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow

LINE Red LOS: Tributary side No alarm


LOF: Tributary side
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Lb (See Caution footnote.)

Yellow APSB, APSCM, APSMM No alarm


FEP
AIS-L: Tributary side
DCCFAIL

Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE S Green Tributary send side active Tributary send side inactive

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE R Green Tributary receive side active Tributary receive side inactive

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test


a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed do not match.
b
Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream
site relative to this unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


5-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
6
CHAPTERS MICROPROCESSOR (CPU1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
➤ 6 CPU1
7 CRF1 6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
8 DCC1
6.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 6.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 6.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
13 HED1/HED2
6.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 6.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 6
Microprocessor (CPU1) Unit Description
Overview

6.1 Overview
The Central Processing Unit (CPU1) is the core of the FLASH®-192 Management Complex.
This unit contains the central processor used to execute the software that governs system
operation, configuration, and the customer interface. The part number for this unit is
FC9511CPU1.

Table 6-1 [p. 6-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 6-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

6.2 Features
The CPU1 provides the following features:
■ Dual CPUs (68360 and 68040)
■ Active and standby Flash memory for system software
■ Alarm circuit indication that one of the redundant power supplies on the PWR1 unit
has failed; alarm circuit available on Transport shelf FC9511SFU1-I05

6.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the CPU1 plug-in unit are as follows:

Width: 22 mm

Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

6.4 Functional Description


Figure 6-1 [p. 6-3] is a simplified block diagram of the CPU1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


6-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 6
Microprocessor (CPU1) Unit Description
Functional Description

Internal LAN
RS-232
Modem Interface
Driver CPU
Craft Interface 68360

CPU
68040

Flash
Active

Universal Access Flash


Bus (to other CPU Standby
Management IF
Complex Units)

Real Time
Clocks

SRAM

SWDL

FAIL/SVCE
d7076.3

CPU RESET

Figure 6-1: CPU1 Simplified Block Diagram

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 6-3
CHAPTER 6
Microprocessor (CPU1) Unit Description
Options

6.4.1 Processors
There are two processors used on this unit. The first is an MC68360, which is used to handle
the first layer of software needed for the internal local area network (LAN), a modem
interface, and the craft interface. This processor runs in the slave mode. The modem interface
is terminated directly on CPU1.

The main processor of the FLASH-192 system is the MC68040 device on this unit. It
communicates with other processors and the peripheral hardware through the universal access
bus (UAB). This processor terminates layers 4 through 7 of the Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) protocol stack for data communication channel (DCC), LAN, and
X.25 ports.

The current operating program is stored in the Flash memory designated as active. The
previous version of the operating software is stored in the standby section of Flash memory.
When software is downloaded into the unit, it is loaded into the standby Flash memory.
Promotion of the downloaded software to the active status is partially accomplished by
switching the designations of the active and standby memories.

A real-time clock is used to provide timestamp information on performance and other status
data when it is reported to the craft or other interfaces.

A CPU reset button is provided on the front of the CPU1. Pressing the reset button with a
thin tool, such as a ballpoint pen tip, causes the system processor to restart.

6.4.2 Unit Power


This unit is powered by the PWR1 power converter in the Transport shelf. The typical and
maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:
■ Typical: 12.7 watts
■ Maximum: 17.3 watts

6.5 Options
There are no provisioning options that affect the operation of the CPU1. It is not necessary to
perform any optioning activities when replacing a CPU1. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270,
System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A.

6.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 6-2 [p. 6-5] shows the front panel of the CPU1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


6-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 6
Microprocessor (CPU1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

SWDL

CPU
RESET
CPU1

d7029

Figure 6-2: CPU1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 6-5
CHAPTER 6
Microprocessor (CPU1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 6-2 [p. 6-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the CPU1.

Table 6-2: CPU1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Watchdog timera Operation normal


Equipment failure

Blinking Equipment mismatchb Equipment match


red

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

SWDL Green CPU Flash memory being loaded No download

Bootup in process Boot finished

Yellow Flash memory bank error Flash memory bank OK

Lamp test No lamp test

Red No valid operational software Valid load OK


a This timer refers to the initial boot sequence where the software load is verified. If this timer expires, a RED LED
will light, followed by a CPU1 reset.
b
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


6-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
7
CHAPTERS CRAFT INTERFACE (CRF1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
➤ 7 CRF1 7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
8 DCC1
7.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 7.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 7.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
13 HED1/HED2
7.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 7.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 7
Craft Interface (CRF1) Unit Description
Overview

7.1 Overview
The Craft Interface (CRF1) unit provides front-panel craft access for interface and processing
for a local communication network (LCN) local area network (LAN), and X.25 data
communications network (DCN). It also includes two OC-192 section data communication
channels (SDCCs) in single OC-192 Transport shelf configurations and four OC-192
SDCCs in 4-fiber bidirectional line-switched ring (4F-BLSR). The fifth channel is reserved
for OC-48, OC-12, or OC-3 SDCC. The part number for this unit is FC9511CRF1.

Table 7-1 [p. 7-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 7-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

7.2 Features
The CRF1 provides the following features:
■ Processing and routing for two OC-192 and one OC-48, OC-12, or OC-3 data
communication channels (DCCs)
■ Interface for craft access

Interface, processing, and routing of the LCN LAN
■ Interface, processing, and routing of the X.25 DCN
■ Provisioning data backup

7.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the CRF1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 20 mm

Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


7-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 7
Craft Interface (CRF1) Unit Description
Functional Description

7.4 Functional Description


Figure 7-1 [p. 7-4] is a simplified block diagram of the CRF1.

7.4.1 Processors
Two on-board microprocessors provide the processing power for the CRF1:

The serial communication channels of the processors provide the terminations for four
OC-192 channels (labeled SDCC 1 through SDCC 4 in Figure 7-1 [p. 7-4]), and one
OC-48, OC-12, or OC-3 tributary channel (labeled SDCC 5 in Figure 7-1 [p. 7-4]).
Channels 1 through 4 are assigned by the system as the OC-192 SDCCs are turned up
by the user. Channel 5 is assigned by the system to the first tributary (OC-48, OC-12,
or OC-3) SDCC turned up by the user.
Note: An additional 15 SDCCs can be configured and provisioned if a DCC1 unit is present. An
additional 30 SDCCs are possible with two DCC1 units.
■ The two microprocessors handle the communication interfaces with the X.25 and
external 10Base-T LAN for use in communicating with remote systems.

7.4.2 Data Communications


The DCC terminations provide the physical termination of the SDCCs. The external LCN
LAN and X.25 DCN provide operations communications with other network elements
(NEs) and systems. The LAN conforms to the 10Base-T standard for 10-Mb/s Ethernet. The
X.25 interface conforms to RS-422 electrical standards and provides the link access
procedure-balanced (LAPB) protocol termination functionality.

The data link and networking layers of the communication protocol are processed by the
central processing units (CPUs). These layers process the data packets and route them to the
appropriate channel or to the main CPU if destined for the local NE.

The internal LAN port is used for routing message traffic between the DCC, craft interface,
and CPU. It is also used for passing software between units during the software download
process.

7.4.3 Indicators
Front-panel LEDs indicate unit alarm, the logging on of a user through the craft interface,
and the presence of a software download process from a remote site or from the craft interface
port.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 7-3
CHAPTER 7
Craft Interface (CRF1) Unit Description
Functional Description

To CPU RS-232 Craft Access


Unit Driver (front)

LAN, 10Base-T
LAN Local Access Bus
X.25
RS-422
CPU
To/from SDCC
HEDx Unit
SDCC

BOOT
ROM
SDCC
To/from SDCC
HEDx Unit CPU
SDCC
Internal LAN
(to CPU1 LAN
and CRF1) Flash
Active

NVM (EEPROM)
Database Backup
Flash
Standby

Universal
Access Bus Interface
(to CPU)

COM

ACS

SWDL

CPU: Central processing unit FAIL/SVCE


CRF: Craft interface
SDCC: Data communications channel
d6954.fh8_6

EEPROM: Electronically erasable programmable read only memory


LAN: Local area network
ROM: Read only memory
NVM: Nonvolatile memory

Figure 7-1: CRF1 Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


7-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 7
Craft Interface (CRF1) Unit Description
Options

7.4.4 Memory
Two banks of Flash memory are provided for storage of downloaded software and system
configuration files. Nonvolatile memory (NVM) is provided for active and standby copies of
the provisioning database. These are used during remote memory backup and restore
functions.

The current operating program is stored in the Flash memory designated as active. The
previous version of the operating software is stored in the standby section of Flash memory.
When software is downloaded into the unit, it is loaded into the standby Flash memory.
Promotion of the downloaded software to the active status is partially accomplished by
switching the designations of the active and standby memories.

7.4.5 Unit Power


This unit is powered by the PWR1 power converter in the Transport shelf. The typical and
maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:
■ Typical: TBD watts
■ Maximum: 10.0 watts

7.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of CRF1 are set during provisioning and are stored in
memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any optioning
activities when replacing a CRF1. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring
Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of the provisioning options.

7.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 7-2 [p. 7-6] shows the front panel of the CRF1.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 7-5
CHAPTER 7
Craft Interface (CRF1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

COM
ACS

SWDL

TERM
CRF1

d7031

Figure 7-2: CRF1 Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


7-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 7
Craft Interface (CRF1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 7-2 [p. 7-7] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the CRF1.

Table 7-2: CRF1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No alarms

Blinking Equipment mismatcha Equipment match


red

Green In service, active N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

ACS Green Active session Log off


CTRL-C (forced logoff )
CTRL-X (forced logoff )
Auto logoff

Lamp test No lamp test

COM Red Data link or network alarm on: No data link or network alarm

LCN

X.25
■ DCC

Lamp test No lamp test

SWDL Green CRF1 Flash memory being loaded No download

Yellow Flash memory bank error Flash memory bank OK


Lamp test No lamp test

Red No valid operational software Valid load OK


a
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 7-7
8
CHAPTERS DATA COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL
1 Introduction (DCC1) UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
➤ 8 DCC1
8.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 8.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 8.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
13 HED1/HED2
8.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 8.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 8
Data Communications Channel (DCC1) Unit Description
Overview

8.1 Overview
The Data Communications Channel (DCC1) unit used with the FLASH®-192 provides the
termination and routing of the section data communication channels (SDCCs) embedded in
the section overhead of the SONET line interfaces. Up to 15 OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48
SDCCs can be processed by the DCC1 unit. The Craft Interface (CRF1) unit processes an
additional two OC-192 SDCCs and a single OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48 SDCC. The part
number for this unit is FC9511DCC1.

Note: The CRF1 unit (reference Chapter 7 in this practice) supports up to four OC-192 line SDCC
terminations and one tributary (OC-48, OC-12, or OC-3) termination. The DCC1 unit in slot
DCC(1) provides 15 additional SDCC terminations for tributaries in HS1, LS1, or LS2. The DCC1
unit in slot DCC(2) (available only in 4-fiber bidirectional line-switched ring [4F-BLSR] systems or
when a Routing shelf is used) provides 15 SDCCs for tributaries in HS2, LS3, or LS4.

Table 8-1 [p. 8-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 8-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

8.2 Features
The DCC1 provides the following:

Processing and routing of the SONET SDCC via the 7-layer Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) protocol
■ Internal Flash memory for both active and standby operational software
Note: Flash memory is nonvolatile programmable memory. Data remains in storage even if
power is removed or lost from the DCC1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


8-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 8
Data Communications Channel (DCC1) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

8.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the DCC1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 20 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

8.4 Functional Description


Figure 8-1 [p. 8-4] is a simplified block diagram of the DCC1.

8.4.1 SDCC Processing


The SDCC data lines in the section overhead channels are communicated by the Hub unit
(HUB1, HUB2, HUBL [HUB3], HUBR [HUB4], and HUBU [HUB5]) and Overhead
Processing unit HEDx, (HED1, HED2, or HED3) to the DCC1. Up to 15 SDCC serial data
lines (labeled SDCC 6 through SDCC 20 in Figure 8-1 [p. 8-4]) are terminated on four
internal processors. These channels are sequentially assigned by the system as the OC-48,
OC-12, or OC-3 SDCCs in HS1, LS1, or LS2 and are turned up by the user.

Note: Reference Chapter 7 in this practice for details of SDCCs 1 through 5 on the CRF1 unit.

Note: In 4F-BLSR systems or when a Routing shelf is used, a DCC1 unit in slot DCC(2) provides
15 SDCCs for tributaries in HS2, LS3, or LS4.

These internal processors handle framing, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) generation, bit
stuffing, address detection, flag/abort/idle generation and/or detection, and the CRC and
frame error detection of the D-channel link access protocol (LAPD). Messages received on
one SDCC can be rerouted to another SDCC within the DCC1, or to another channel on
the CRF1 unit through the internal local area network (LAN) ports on each unit.

The data link layer and network layer are processed in the CPUs on the DCC1. The upper
four OSI layers are processed by the central processing units (CPUs) on the CPU1 unit when
data is targeted for the local network element (NE). These layers provide termination of the
SDCC and routing of the SDCC data.

Flash memory devices are present to support software download. These devices store the
active and standby copies of the operating software for the SDCC processors. The memory
designated active provides the operating instructions used in current processing. The standby
memory is used to store a separate copy of the software, which may be either identical to the
current software, or a version previous to the current software, or a planned update version of
the software. When new software is downloaded to the Management Complex, the new
DCC1 operating software is placed in the standby memory. Cutover to the new software
involves redesignating the Flash memory devices, switching active to standby, and vice versa.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 8-3
CHAPTER 8
Data Communications Channel (DCC1) Unit Description
Functional Description

Internal LAN
to CRF1 Unit

Local Access Bus


SDCC
From/to CPU
SDCC
HEDx Unit
SDCC

SDCC
From/to SDCC
CPU
HEDx Unit SDCC
SDCC
BOOT
ROM

SDCC SRAM
From/to SDCC
CPU
HEDx Unit SDCC
SDCC Flash
Active

Flash
SDCC Standby
From/to SDCC CPU
HEDx Unit SDCC
SDCC

Universal
Access Bus CPU-IF
(to CPU1 Unit)

COMM

SWLOAD

CPU: Central processing unit FAIL/SVCE


CPU-IF: Central processing unit interface
d6953.fh8_3

SDCC: Section data communications channel


LAN: Local area network
SRAM: Static random access memory
ROM: Read only memory

Note: SDCC ports are sequentially assigned by the system on the DCC1 unit in slot DCC(1) as tributary
SDCCs in HS1, LS1, or LS2 and are turned up by the user. The DCC1 unit in slot DCC(2) supports tributary
SDCCs in HS2, LS3, or LS4 (in 4F-BLSR systems and in systems with a Routing shelf).

Figure 8-1: DCC1 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


8-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 8
Data Communications Channel (DCC1) Unit Description
Options

8.4.2 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:
■ Typical: 13.4 watts

Maximum: 18.1 watts

8.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the DCC1 are set during communications interface
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing a DCC1.

8.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 8-2 [p. 8-6] shows the front panel of the DCC1.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 8-5
CHAPTER 8
Data Communications Channel (DCC1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

COM

SWDL
DCC1

d7759.2

Figure 8-2: DCC1 Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


8-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 8
Data Communications Channel (DCC1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 8-2 [p. 8-7] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 8-2: DCC1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit failure Normal operation


DC–DC converter failure

Blinking Equipment mismatcha Installed unit matches slot


red provisioning

Green In service, normal Out of service (OOS)

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

COMM Red LAPD-DCCb Normal

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

SWDL Green DCC1 Flash memory being loaded No download

Yellow Flash memory bank error Flash memory bank OK

Lamp test No lamp test

Red No valid operational software Valid load OK


a
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b This alarm is activated after three retries.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 8-7
9
CHAPTERS DISPERSION COMPENSATION (DCMX)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
8 DCC1
9.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
➤ 9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 9.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 9.4 Functional Description and Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
13 HED1/HED2
9.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 9.6 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Overview

9.1 Overview
The Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) units provide a fixed amount of dispersion
compensation for the OC-192 signal. This compensation may be required when single-mode
fiber (SMF) is used for spans exceeding 40 km. There are eight versions of this unit, as listed
in Table 9-1 [p. 9-2]. As required, one or two units can be placed in a given OC-192 span. If
one unit is sufficient, it is placed in the transmit-end optical path. If two units are required,
the second unit is placed in the receive-end optical path.

The units are passive optical units with no electrical connections and are housed in a
Dispersion Compensating Module shelf, either SFD1, SFD2, or SFD3, as described in
Table 9-1 [p. 9-2]. Table 9-2 [p. 9-3] list the optical insertion loss for the DCMx units.

Table 9-1: DCMx Shelves and Units

Name Part Number Description

SFD1 FC9511DCM1 Provides housing for up to four DCMx units

SFD2 FC9511DCM2 Provides housing for up to six DCMx units

SFD3 FC9511DCM3 Provides housing for a mixture of single-height and double-height DCMx
units

DCM1 FC9511DCM1 Provides –600 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the transmitter

DCM2 FC9511DCM2 Provides –1100 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the receiver

DCM3 FC9511DCM3 Provides –600 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the receiver

DCM4 FC9511DCM4 Provides –700 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the transmitter

DCM5 FC9511DCM5 Provides –1350 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the receiver

DCM6 FC9511DCM6 Provides –1500 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the receiver

DCM7 FC9511DCM7 Provides –1350 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the receiver.; double
height unit

DCM8 FC9511DCM8 Provides –1500 ps/nm dispersion compensation at the receiver; double
height unit

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


9-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Overview

Table 9-2: DCMx Insertion Loss

Name Insertion Loss

DCM1 3–5 dB

DCM2 7–9 dB

DCM3 7–9 dB

DCM4 3–6 dB

DCM5 7–9 dB

DCM6 7–9 dB

DCM7 7–9 dB

DCM8 7–9 dB

Table 9-3 [p. 9-3] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 9-3: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Transmitter/receiver/DCM FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7


combinations

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location Section 9.6 [p. 9-9] of this practice

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 9-3
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Features

9.2 Features
The DCMx unit provides the following features:
■ Passive optical devices with input/output through SC optical connectors

Eight versions for different levels of dispersion compensation

9.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the DCMx plug-in units are listed in Table 9-4 [p. 9-4].

Table 9-4: DCMx Plug-In Units Physical Dimensions

Name Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

DCM1, DCM2, DCM3, DCM4 238 40.5 276.5

DCM5, DCM6 490.5 40.5 276.5

DCM7, DCM8 238 80.5 261.5

DCM1E 238 40.5 276.5

DCM4E, DCM5E 490.5 40.5 276.5

9.4 Functional Description and Applications


This section describes the function of the DCMx units and gives potential applications and
locations of the units in an OC-192 span.

9.4.1 Function
Figure 9-1 [p. 9-5] is a simplified block diagram of the DCMx unit. This is a passive unit,
requiring only optical input and output connections. Besides the optical connectors, the only
other component is a coil of dispersion-compensating optical fiber.

When used at the transmit end of a span, the DCMx is located in the signal flow between the
laser output and the postamplifier. This requires an optical jumper to carry the optical signal
from the TCxn unit laser output to the DCMx input and another to carry the signal from the
DCMx output to the TCxn postamplifier input. The DCMx can also be used between the
TSxn and TAxx units.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


9-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Functional Description and Applications

Dispersion
Optical Input SC Compensation SC Optical Output
Fiber Coil

d7191
Figure 9-1: DCMx Unit Simplified Block Diagram

When used at the receive end of a span, the DCMx is located in the signal flow between the
preamplifier output and receiver optical-to-electrical (O/E) converter input. This requires an
optical jumper to carry the optical signal from the RCxn unit preamplifier output to the
DCMx input and another to carry the signal from the DCMx output to the RCxn O/E input.
See Figures 9-2 [p. 9-6] through 9-4 [p. 9-8].

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 9-5
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Functional Description and Applications

40 – 60 km
SMF Span with DCM1
TCx7 or TCx8 RCx1 or RCx3
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
E/O AMP
OUT IN

DCM1
IN OUT

61 – 100 km
SMF Span with DCM1 and DCM3
TCx7 or TCx8 RCx4
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
E/O AMP AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN

DCM1 DCM3
IN OUT IN OUT

101 – 110 km
SMF Span with DCM1 and DCM2
TCx7 or TCx8 RCx4
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
E/O AMP AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN d7376.fh8_1

DCM1 DCM2
IN OUT IN OUT

Figure 9-2: DCMx Unit Locations with Composite Transmitters


in an OC-192 SMF Span (DCM1, DCM2, DCM3)

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


9-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Functional Description and Applications

40 – 60 km
SMF Span with DCM1
TSx2 TAx1 RCx1 or RCx3
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
OPT OPT
OUT IN

DCM1
IN OUT

61 – 100 km
SMF Span with DCM1 and DCM3
TSx2 TAx1 RCx4
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
OPT OPT AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN

DCM1 DCM3
IN OUT IN OUT

101 – 110 km
SMF Span with DCM1 and DCM2
TSx2 TAx1 RCx4
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
OPT OPT AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN m0619.fh8_4

DCM1 DCM2
IN OUT IN OUT

Figure 9-3: DCMx Unit Locations with Standard Transmitters


in an OC-192 SMF Span (DCM1, DCM2, DCM3)

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 9-7
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Functional Description and Applications

110 – 120 km
SMF Span with DCM1 and DCM2
TCx9 RCx6
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
E/O AMP AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN

DCM1 DCM2
IN OUT IN OUT

121 – 140 km
SMF Span with DCM4 and DCM5
TCx9 RCx6
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
E/O AMP AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN

DCM4 DCM5
IN OUT IN OUT

141 – 153 km
SMF Span with DCM4 and DCM6
TCx9 RCx6
OPT
IN
E/O O/E
Optional OPT
Post Amp OUT Pre Amp
E/O AMP AMP O/E
OUT IN OUT IN
m0618.fh8_3

DCM4 DCM6
IN OUT IN OUT

Figure 9-4: DCMx Unit Locations with TCx9/RCx6 Units


in an OC-192 SMF Span (DCM4, DCM5, DCM6)

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


9-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Options

9.4.2 Applications
Figures 9-2 [p. 9-6] through 9-4 [p. 9-8] show the potential locations of the DCMx units
when required in an OC-192 span.

Table 9-5 [p. 9-9] lists the DCMx unit requirements for various SMF applications.

Table 9-5: DCMx Requirements for SMF OC-192 Spans

Span Length DCMx at DCMx at


(km) Transmitter Receiver

0–40 None None

40–60 DCM1 None

60–100 DCM1 DCM3

100–120 DCM1 DCM2

120–140 DCM4 DCM5

140–153 DCM4 DCM6

120–140 DCM4 DCM7

140–153 DCM4 DCM8

9.5 Options
There are no provisioning options that affect the operation of the DCMx unit. It is not
necessary to perform any optioning activities when replacing a DCMx unit.

9.6 Physical Description


Figure 9-5 [p. 9-10] is an exploded view of SFD1 that includes a pair of DCMx units with
fiber-optic cables attached, the shelf, and front cover. Figure 9-6 [p. 9-11] is an exploded view
of SFD2 that includes a pair of DCMx units with fiber-optic cables attached, the shelf, and
front cover.

The SFD3 is a 3-layer shelf that can accommodate mixed, long-, and short-reach applications.
It is used in applications where one east/west path is less than 120 km and the opposite east/
west path is greater than 121 km. Figure 9-7 [p. 9-12] is an exploded view of SFD3 that
includes a pair of DCMx units with fiber-optic cables attached, the shelf, and front cover.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 9-9
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Physical Description

The DCMx units have no visual indicators.

Figure 9-5: DCMx Units in the SFD1 Shelf—Exploded View

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


9-10 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Physical Description

Figure 9-6: DCMx Units in the SFD2 Shelf—Exploded View

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 9-11
CHAPTER 9
Dispersion Compensation (DCMx) Unit Description
Physical Description

Figure 9-7: DCMx Units in the SFD3 Shelf—Exploded View

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


9-12 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
10
CHAPTERS 10-GB/S DEMULTIPLEXER (DMR1/
1 Introduction DMS1/DMS2) UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
8 DCC1
10.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
9 DCMx
➤ 10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 10.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 10.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
13 HED1/HED2
10.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 10.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Overview

10.1 Overview
The 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit exists in three forms: the DMR1 unit, used in the
regenerator application; the DMS1 unit, used in nonregenerator configurations without
forward error correction (FEC); and the DMS2 unit, used in nonregenerator configurations
with FEC. All three units demultiplex the SONET STS-192 signal that is received from the
associated OC-192 optical receiver unit. One DMx1/DMS2 unit is required for each
OC-192 line terminated by the system.

Table 10-1 [p. 10-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 10-1: Demultiplexer Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

DMR1 FC9511DMR1 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit (regenerator, Releases 2.3 and 2.3.1
only)

DMS1 FC9511DMS1 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit

DMS2 FC9511DMS2 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit with FEC

Table 10-2 [p. 10-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 10-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

10.2 Features
The following subsections provide feature descriptions of the 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


10-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

10.2.1 DMR1 Features


The DMR1 (demultiplexer-regenerator) unit provides the following specific features:
■ Demultiplexes the STS-192 signal received from the OC-192 receiver and sends the
STS payload to the corresponding 10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1) unit
■ Detects loss of signal (LOS) and out-of-frame (OOF) conditions and inserts alarm
indication signal (AIS)

10.2.2 DMS1 Features


The DMS1 (demultiplexer-standard) unit provides the following specific features:
■ Demultiplexes the STS-192 signal received from the OC-192 receiver into four groups
corresponding to the four OC-48 tributaries. These signal groups are sent to the
OC-48 Interface (MMx1) units.
■ Detects LOS and OOF conditions and inserts AIS.

10.2.3 DMS2 Features


The DMS2 (demultiplexer-standard) unit provides the following specific features:
■ Demultiplexes the STS-192 signal received from the OC-192 receiver into four groups
corresponding to the four OC-48 tributaries. These signal groups are sent to the
OC-48 Interface (MMx1) units.
■ Detects LOS and OOF conditions and inserts AIS.
■ FEC to improve the bit error rate of the FLASH®-192 optical transmission of the
SONET payload.
■ Supports STS-48c signal format.

Supports overhead byte (OHB) transparency, which allows the FLASH-192 NE to
forward tributary traffic without processing SONET section and line overhead.

10.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the DMR1, DMS1, and DMS2 plug-in units are as follows:
■ Width: 36 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 10-3
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

10.4 Functional Description


The following subsections contain functional descriptions of the 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit.

10.4.1 DMR1 Unit


The DMR1 unit is used only in the regenerator configuration. Figure 10-1 [p. 10-4] is a
simplified block diagram of the DMR1 unit.

The DMR1 unit is used to demultiplex the SONET STS-192 data received from the Optical
Receiver (RCx1) unit into its 192 component STS signals. The unit then sends them to the
downstream multiplexer (MXR1) unit for further processing. Signal quality monitoring and
SONET section overhead processing is similar to that described in the next section for the
DMS1 unit.


STS-192 •
Section
from Framing • To MXR1 Unit
Termination
Receiver •
(Rxxn Unit) •
Overhead
(to HUBx)

Management
Complex Unit
Interface Control
(HUBx)
FAIL/SVCE

PWR A
d7069.fh8_3

Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 10-1: DMR1 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


10-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

10.4.2 DMS1 Unit


Figure 10-2 [p. 10-5] is a simplified block diagram of the DMS1 unit.

STS-192
from
Framing •
Receiver Demux • To MMx1
(Rxxn Units) Section and Distribution • Units
Line •
Termination •

Overhead (to HUBx)


Clock (to SCU1)

Management Unit
Complex Control
Interface
(HUBx)
FAIL/SVCE

PWR A

d7070.fh8_3
Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 10-2: DMS1/DMS2 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

The DMS1 unit is used to demultiplex the SONET STS-192 data received by the RCx1 unit
into its 192 component STS signals and to distribute them to the appropriate OC-48
interface (MMx1) units for further processing.

Framing

The framing circuit synchronizes to the SONET frame pattern embedded in the incoming
signals. The framing circuit locates the frame pattern bytes (A1 and A2) and then passes the
byte-synchronized data, clock, and frame pulse to the demultiplexing circuits. If the frame
pattern cannot be found within a prescribed time, an OOF signal is generated. An OOF
counter generates a loss of frame (LOF) report to the Management Complex if the OOF
condition persists for more than 2.5 seconds. Loss of input data and/or clock also causes the
generation of an LOS condition report. Upon detection of an LOS or LOF condition, a path
AIS signal is generated for downstream transmission.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 10-5
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

Demultiplexing and Error Detection

The demultiplexer divides the incoming signals into 192 individual STS channels. If this
circuit detects a line AIS (L-AIS) condition in the data, it generates a message to the
Management Complex. The B1 and B2 parity bytes in the data stream are also monitored and
compared with internal calculations of the received data parity. Should the calculated error
rate exceed the limit established by the Management Complex, either a signal degrade or
signal fail report is generated.

When the bit error rate (BER) exceeds the signal degrade threshold established by the
Management Complex, a signal degrade report is generated. A signal degrade (SD) alarm is
then raised as a direct-coupled alarm to the HUB unit (HUB1 or HUB2) and the threshold
crossing (SD1) is reported to the Management Complex. After the rate has exceeded the SD1
threshold, it must drop below the SD2 (SD2 = 0.1 x SD1) threshold before the SD alarm is
cleared. If the count rate exceeds 10-3, a signal fail (SF) alarm is reported to the Management
Complex.

SONET Overhead Processing

The demultiplexer (DMUX) circuit accesses the SONET overhead bytes as directed by the
Management Complex and routes them to the Management Complex.

10.4.3 DMS2 Unit


Figure 10-2 [p. 10-5] shows the simplified block diagram of the DMS2 unit.

The DMS2 unit is used to demultiplex the SONET STS-192 data received by the RCx1 unit
into its 192 component STS signals and to distribute them to the appropriate OC-48
interface (MMx1) units for further processing.

Framing

The framing circuit synchronizes to the SONET frame pattern embedded in the incoming
signals. The framing circuit locates the frame pattern bytes (A1 and A2) and then passes the
byte synchronized data, clock, and frame pulse to the demultiplexing circuits. If the frame
pattern cannot be found within a prescribed time, an OOF signal is generated. An OOF
counter generates an LOF report to the Management Complex if the OOF condition persists
for more than 2.5 seconds. Loss of input data and/or clock also causes the generation of an
LOS condition report. Upon detection of an LOS or LOF condition, a path AIS signal is
generated for downstream transmission.

Forward Error Correction

The DMS2 unit can enable/disable the FEC feature on the receive side of the OC-192 facility.
When FEC is enabled, the DMS2 decodes the FEC code words in the unused line overhead
and corrects any errors detected that are correctable.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


10-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

Demultiplexing and Error Detection

The demultiplexer divides the incoming signals into 192 individual STS channels. If this
circuit detects an L-AIS condition in the data, it generates a message to the Management
Complex. The B1 and B2 parity bytes in the data stream are also monitored and compared
with internal calculations of the parity of the received data parity. Should the calculated error
rate exceed the limit established by the Management Complex, either a signal degrade or
signal fail report is generated.

When the bit error rate (BER) exceeds the signal degrade threshold established by the
Management Complex, a signal degrade report is generated. A signal degrade (SD) alarm is
then raised as a direct-coupled alarm to the HUB unit (HUB1 or HUB2) and the threshold
crossing (SD1) is reported to the Management Complex. After the rate has exceeded the SD1
threshold, it must drop below the SD2 (SD2 = 0.1 x SD1) threshold before the SD alarm is
cleared. If the count rate exceeds 10-3, a signal fail (SF) alarm is reported to the Management
Complex.

SONET Overhead Processing

The demultiplexer circuit accesses the SONET overhead bytes as directed by the Management
Complex and routes them to the Management Complex.

10.4.4 Management Complex Interface


A serial data interface is provided between the DMx1/DMS2 units and the HUB unit for
communication with the Management Complex to report of circuit and signal failures. In
addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management Complex to
provision the unit, operate functional switches, and turn on/off the indicator LEDs on the
unit front panel.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 10-7
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Options

10.4.5 DMR1 and DMS1/DMS2 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and return are accepted into the unit.
Table 10-3 [p. 10-8] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 10-3: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


DMS1 31.5 40.7

DMS2 34.0 45.1

DMR1 16.2 21.4

10.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the DMx1/DMS2/DMR1 units are set during
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing a DMx1/DMS2/DMR1 unit. Refer to
FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on the
service state provisioning options.

10.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 10-3 [p. 10-9] shows the front panel of the DMx1/DMS2/DMR1 units.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


10-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE FAIL/SVCE FAIL/SVCE


d7045

d7025

DMR1 DMS1 DMS2


m0540

Note: DMR1 is used in the regenerator configuration. DMS1 is used in all nonregenerator configurations.
DMS2 can be used in Release 3.2 or higher (4F-BLSR applications) if FEC capability is desired. DMS2 has all the
functionality of DMS1, plus FEC.

Figure 10-3: DMR1 and DMS1/DMS2 Unit Front Panels

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 10-9
CHAPTER 10
10-Gb/s Demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 10-4 [p. 10-10] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 10-4: DMx1/DMS2 Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment alarm No failure


DC-DC conversion failure
Regenerator cable(s) not in placea Regenerator cable(s) in place

Blinking red Equipment mismatchb Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No error


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow
a Onlyvalid for DMR1 in regenerator application.
b
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


10-10 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
11
CHAPTERS FAN (FAN1/FAN3) UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 11.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
8 DCC1
11.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 11.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
➤ 11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 11.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 11.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 11
Fan (FAN1/FAN3) Unit Description
Overview

11.1 Overview
The Fan (FAN1/FAN3) unit provides cooling airflow for the FLASH®-192 shelf. The FAN1/
FAN3 is a plug-in unit that occupies a horizontal slot that spans the width of the shelf. Two
fan slots are provided in each FLASH-192 shelf. The lower fan slot is located at the bottom of
the shelf, just above an air filter slot. The upper FAN1/FAN3 unit resides below the top row
of plug-in units. The part numbers for these units are FC9511FAN1 and FC9511FAN3
respectively.

Note: FAN3 is a new, more efficient version of FAN1. The form, fit, and function of the two fan
units are similar.

Table 11-1 [p. 11-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 11-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

11.2 Features
The FAN1/FAN3 unit provides the following features:
■ Plug-in unit functionality

Two independently fused fan sets in each FAN1/FAN3 unit

Two front-panel LED indicators to show the status of each fan set

11.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the FAN1 and FAN3 plug-in units are as follows:

Width: 525 mm
■ Height: 40 mm
■ Depth: 220 mm

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


11-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 11
Fan (FAN1/FAN3) Unit Description
Functional Description

11.4 Functional Description


Figure 11-1 [p. 11-3] is a simplified block diagram of the FAN1/FAN3.

FAN ALM 1
FAN ALM 2
Lamp TST

-48VB
-48VA

SG
FG
Connected to Fuse 1

G
Connected to Fuse 2
D-Sub 25-Pin connector

1 8 3 10 5 12

7 2 9 4 11 6

FAN 1 7 8 2 3 9 10 4 5 11 12 6
Fuse 1 Fuse 2

FAN CONTROL

FAIL/SVC LED
1 2

FAN 1 7 8 2 3 9 10 4 5 11 12 6

FG

Fuse 1
-48VA Filter Power for FAN #1—#6

-48V -5V Converter FAN Alarm Detection


-48VB

G
Power for FAN #7—#12
FAN Fuse 2
ALM 1
FAN
ALM 2
SG

FAIL/
SVC LED
d7190.2

Lamp
TST 1 2
FAN CONTROL

Figure 11-1: FAN1/FAN3 Simplified Block Diagram

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 11-3
CHAPTER 11
Fan (FAN1/FAN3) Unit Description
Options

The plug-in FAN1/FAN3 unit receives office battery power through its backplane connector.
The fans operate continuously when plugged into a powered-up shelf.

The office battery is filtered to remove any AC or noise components. The


filtered–48 V DC is fed to fans 1 through 6 from fuse 1 and fans 7 through 12 from fuse 2.
Note that the physical layout of the fans provides even distribution of airflow if a single fuse
fails. The typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:

Typical: 56.7 watts
■ Maximum: 97.9 watts

A –5 V DC converter provides power for the fan alarm circuitry. The status of fans 1, 2, 3, 7,
8, and 9 is monitored by the FAN ALM 1 detection circuits. The remaining six fans are
monitored by the FAN ALM 2 detection circuits. Failure of a single fan in a group produces a
fan alarm, while other fans in the group continue to operate. The alarm outputs are fed to the
Management Complex to provide autonomous alarm messages if a fan fails.

11.5 Options
There are no provisioning options that affect the operation of the FAN1/FAN3. It is not
necessary to perform any optioning activities when replacing a FAN1/FAN3.

11.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 11-2 [p. 11-4] shows the front panel of the FAN1. The front panel of FAN3 is similar.

FAIL/SVCE
1 2

d7035
FAN1

Figure 11-2: FAN1 Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


11-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 11
Fan (FAN1/FAN3) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 11-2 [p. 11-5] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the FAN1/FAN3.

Table 11-2: FAN1/FAN3 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE1 Red Equipment fail No alarm


FAIL/SVCE2 Fuse failure

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 11-5
12
CHAPTERS FAN (FAN2/FAN4) UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 12.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
8 DCC1
12.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 12.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
➤ 12 FAN2/FAN4 12.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 12.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 12
Fan (FAN2/FAN4) Unit Description
Overview

12.1 Overview
The Fan (FAN2/FAN4) unit provides cooling airflow for the Routing shelf. Four FAN2/
FAN4 units occupy horizontal slots that span the width of the shelf. The part numbers for
these units are FC9511FAN2 and FC9511FAN4 respectively

Note: FAN4 is a new, more efficient version of FAN2. The form, fit, and function of the two fan
units are similar.

Table 12-1 [p. 12-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 12-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

12.2 Features
The FAN2/FAN4 provides the following features:
■ Plug-in unit functionality

Front-panel LED indicator to show the status of the fan

12.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the FAN2 and FAN4 plug-in units are las follows:
■ Width: 130 mm

Height: 67 mm
■ Depth: 200 mm

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


12-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 12
Fan (FAN2/FAN4) Unit Description
Functional Description

12.4 Functional Description


Figure 12-1 [p. 12-3] is a simplified block diagram of the FAN2/FAN4.

FAN

G
G FAN
-48V Fan-Fail
-48 VA Filter Failure
-5V Detection
-48 VG

Fan-Status

SG

Temperature Power LED


Sensor Control Control

RC Lamp
Test
m1161.fh8_1

Fail/Svc
LED

Figure 12-1: FAN2/FAN4 Simplified Block Diagram

The plug-in FAN2/FAN4 unit receives office battery power through its backplane connector.
The fan operates continuously when plugged into a powered-up shelf. The typical and
maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:

Typical: 11.0 watts
■ Maximum: 43.2 watts

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 12-3
CHAPTER 12
Fan (FAN2/FAN4) Unit Description
Options

A –5 V DC converter provides power for the fan alarm circuitry. The alarm output is fed to
the Management Complex to provide autonomous alarm messages if a fan fails.

12.5 Options
There are no provisioning options that affect the operation of the FAN2/FAN4. It is not
necessary to perform any optioning activities when replacing a FAN2/FAN4.

12.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 12-2 [p. 12-4] shows the front panel of the FAN2 unit. The front panel of FAN4 is
similar.

FAIL/SVC

m0917
FAN2

Figure 12-2: FAN2 Front Panel

Table 12-2 [p. 12-4] lists the LED indicator name, color, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the FAN2/FAN4.

Table 12-2: FAN2/FAN4 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No alarm


Fuse failure
DC/DC conversion failure

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


12-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
13
CHAPTERS OVERHEAD PROCESSING (HED1/HED2)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
8 DCC1
13.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 13.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 13.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
➤ 13 HED1/HED2
13.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 13.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Overview

13.1 Overview
Control and overhead communication between the Management Complex and the transport
units is managed by the Overhead Processing HEDx unit (HED1 and HED2) in the
Management Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf. The HEDx uses an intercomplex
interface (ICI) link to the HUBx (HUB1, HUB2, HUBL [HUB3], or HUBU [HUB5])
units. The HUBx units distribute the data to the appropriate transport units in both the
OC-192 Transport shelf and the Optical Tributary shelf. The part numbers for these units are
FC9511HED1 and FC9511HED2 respectively

Note: For additional information on the HUBx features, refer to Chapter 16 in this practice.

Note: The HED3 and HUBR (HUB4) units (used for ICI link between the Management Complex in
the OC-192 Transport shelf and the transport units in the Routing shelf) are described in
Chapters 14 and 15.

Table 13-1 [p. 13-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 13-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

13.2 Features
The HEDx provides the following features:
■ Alarm/status, control, and overhead communications between Management Complex
and transport units
■ Supports communications through three ICI links

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


13-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions


Uses SONET OC-3 and ATM communications to the HUBx units
■ In 4-fiber bidirectional line-switched ring (4F-BLSR) configuration, a second HEDx
unit is installed in equipment slot HED(2) of the working OC-192 Transport shelf.
This HEDx unit provides ATM communications to the HUBx unit in the protect
OC-192 Transport shelf (HS2), and to Optical Tributary shelves LS3 and LS4, when
present.

13.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the HED1 and HED2 plug-in units are las follows:
■ Width: 26 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 13-3
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Functional Description

13.4 Functional Description


Figure 13-1 [p. 13-4] is a simplified block diagram of the HEDx.

OC-3 ATM SRAM


ICI 1 Upper
(OC-192 Transport Port (1) Unit Data
Interface
Shelf) Images

Universal
OC-3 ATM ICI 2 Middle Access
(Optical Tributary
Interface Port (2) HED Bus
Shelf LS1)
(to CPU)

Lower
OC-3 ATM ICI 3 Port (3)
(Optical Tributary Interface
Shelf LS2)

DCC1 Unit (DCC)

CRF1 Unit (DCC)


Overhead
Matrix AWU1 Unit (E1, E2)

External Interface

ICI 1

ICI 2

d7075.fh8_5
ICI 3

FAIL/SVCE

Note: This drawing shows the ICIs for the HEDx unit installed in equipment slot HED(1). In 4F-BLSR or
systems with LS3 and/or LS4 through the use of a Routing shelf, a second HEDx unit is installed in slot HED(2),
with ICIs as follows:


ICI 1—Protect OC-192 Transport shelf, HS2

ICI 2—Optical Tributary shelf LS3
■ ICI 3—Optical Tributary shelf LS4

Figure 13-1: HED1 Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


13-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Functional Description

13.4.1 Data Processing


The ATM cells from the HUBx unit contain alarm, status, or overhead information. The
status of the high-priority alarms is communicated periodically from the HUBx. Any
indication of a high-priority alarm causes the HEDx to generate a high-priority interrupt to
the central processing unit (CPU) for immediate processing.

Overhead data from the SONET transport line interfaces are delivered to the HEDx.
Overhead is then delivered to the Management Complex and through the overhead matrix for
processing. The section data communications channel (SDCC) data is delivered to the:
■ Craft interface unit (CRF1)

DCC1 unit in slot DCC(1) for SDCC support in HS1, LS1, or LS2
■ DCC1 unit in slot DCC(2) for SDCC support in HS2 (4F-BLSR systems only) and
LS3 or LS4

13.4.2 Orderwire
Orderwire data is delivered to the Alarm/Orderwire (AWU1) unit. Access to a connector on
the backplane is provided for future access to other overhead bytes.

13.4.3 Status Information


The HEDx maintains a copy of the status information of the transport complex units in the
synchronized random access memory (SRAM). The Management Complex can also request
the status of any unit through the HEDx and HUBx.

13.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit.
Table 13-2 [p. 13-5] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 13-2: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


HED1 15.0 20.3

HED2 12.0 13.0

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 13-5
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Options

13.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the HEDx unit are set during provisioning and are
stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing an HEDx. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up
Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of the provisioning options.

13.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 13-2 [p. 13-7] shows the front panel of a typical HEDx unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


13-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

ICI 1
ICI 2
ICI 3
HED1

d7033

Figure 13-2: Typical HEDx Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 13-7
CHAPTER 13
Overhead Processing (HED1/HED2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 13-3 [p. 13-8] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for HEDx units.

Table 13-3: HEDx LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit fail No alarm

Blinking Equipment mismatcha Equipment match


red

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

ICI-1,2,3 Red LOS ICI link OK


LOF
L-AIS
B2-MAJ
L-RDI
LOP
P-AIS
P-RDI

Lamp test No lamp test


a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


13-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
14
CHAPTERS OVERHEAD PROCESSING (HED3)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
8 DCC1
14.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 14.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 14.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
13 HED1/HED2
14.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
➤ 14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 14.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 14
Overhead Processing (HED3) Unit Description
Overview

14.1 Overview
Control and overhead communication between the Management Complex and the routing
units is managed by the Overhead Processing (HED3) unit, in the Management Complex in
the OC-192 Transport shelf. The HED3 uses an intercomplex interface (ICI) link to the
HUBR (HUB4) unit. The HUBR (HUB4) unit distributes the data to the appropriate units
in both the OC-192 Transport shelf and the Routing shelf. The part number for this unit is
FC9511HED3.

Note: For additional information on the HUBR (HUB4) features, refer to Chapter 15 in this
practice.

Table 14-1 [p. 14-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 14-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

14.2 Features
The HED3 provides the following features:
■ Supports for system configured with Routing shelf; installed in equipment slot CPU(2)
of the OC-192 Transport shelf
■ Alarm/status, control, and overhead communications between Management Complex
and routing units

Supports communications through one ICI link
■ Uses SONET OC-3 and ATM communications to the HUBR (HUB4) unit

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


14-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 14
Overhead Processing (HED3) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

14.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the HED3 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 22 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

14.4 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the Overhead Processing
(HED3) unit.

14.4.1 Data Processing


The ATM cells from the HUBR (HUB4) unit contain alarm, status, or overhead information.
The status of the high-priority alarms is communicated periodically from the HUBR
(HUB4). Any indication of a high-priority alarm causes the HED3 to generate a high-priority
interrupt to the CPU for immediate processing.

Overhead data from the SONET transport line interfaces are delivered to the HED3.
Overhead is then delivered to the Management Complex and through the overhead matrix for
processing. The SDCC data is delivered to the Data Communication Channel (DCC1) unit
and the Craft Interface (CRF1) unit. Orderwire data is delivered to the Alarm/Orderwire unit
(AWU1). Access to a connector on the backplane is provided for future access to other
overhead bytes.

14.4.2 Status Information


The HED3 maintains a copy of the status information of the transport complex units in the
synchronized random access memory (SRAM). The Management Complex can also request
the status of any unit through the HED3 and HUBR (HUB4).

14.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 5.5 watts
■ Maximum: 5.7 watts

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 14-3
CHAPTER 14
Overhead Processing (HED3) Unit Description
Options

14.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the HED3 unit are set during provisioning and are
stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing an HED3. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up
Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of the provisioning options.

14.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 14-1 [p. 14-5] shows the front panel of the HED3 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


14-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 14
Overhead Processing (HED3) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FC9511HED3

FAIL/SVCE

ICI
HED3

m0926

Figure 14-1: HED3 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 14-5
CHAPTER 14
Overhead Processing (HED3) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 14-2 [p. 14-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the HED3 unit.

Table 14-2: HED3 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit fail No alarm

Blinking Equipment mismatch a Equipment match


red

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

ICI Red LOS ICI link OK


LOF
L-AIS
B2-MAJ
L-RDI
LOP
P-AIS
P-RDI

Lamp test No lamp test


a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


14-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
15
CHAPTERS HUBR (HUB4) UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 15.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
8 DCC1
15.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 15.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 15.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 15.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
➤ 15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 15
HUBR (HUB4) Unit Description
Overview

15.1 Overview
The HUBR (HUB4) unit, along with the Overhead (OH) Processing (HED3) unit, provides
for communication of overhead, alarm, status, and control data between the Management
Complex units and the Routing shelf units. The HUBR (HUB4) communicates with the
HED3 in the Management Complex over the intercomplex interface (ICI) link. The part
number for this unit is FC9511HUB4.

Table 15-1 [p. 15-2] lists cross-references for additional information on the HUBR (HUB4)
unit.

Table 15-1: Additional HUBR (HUB4) Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

15.2 Features
The HUBR (HUB4) unit provides the following features:
■ Consolidated communications from Routing shelf units to the Management Complex
■ Uses SONET OC-3 and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) over the ICI
■ Priority alarm communications

Test jacks for measuring shelf power

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


15-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 15
HUBR (HUB4) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

15.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the HUBR (HUB4) plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 17 mm

Height: 315 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

15.4 Functional Description


This section provides a functional description of the communication link provided by the
HUBR (HUB4) unit and describes the LED control function of the unit.

15.4.1 Communication Link


Figure 15-1 [p. 15-3] is a simplified block diagram of the HUBR (HUB4) unit.

Management
Complex To/from
Interface ICI OC-3
(to units) Interface HED3
OC-3 ATM
Alarms HUB
(from units)

Overhead Data
(from units)

FAIL/SVC

ICI

System Unit
Clocks Control TRANSP

PWR A
PWR A To circuity
Power
PWR B Converter PWR B
m1160.fh8_1

Figure 15-1: HUBR (HUB4) Unit Simplified Block Diagram

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 15-3
CHAPTER 15
HUBR (HUB4) Unit Description
Options

The HUBR (HUB4), along with the HED3, serves as “network control” for data
communication between the Management Complex units and the Routing shelf units. The
following data are transferred through the HUBR (HUB4) unit:
■ The SONET overhead bytes, which are carried between the OC-192, OC-48, OC-12,
and OC-3 lines and the Management Complex units
■ Alarm/status information from the transport units

Control information from the Management Complex

The ICI link consists of the alarm, status, control, and overhead data mapped to ATM cells,
which are transmitted over an OC-3 optical link (low power). The ICI link communicates
between the HUBR (HUB4) and HED3.

The HUBR (HUB4) prioritizes communications as follows:


■ First, “high priority” alarm and status messages are communicated at set intervals.
■ Next, overhead data is sent with higher priority than status or control information.
■ Finally, status and control information is communicated.

15.4.2 LED Control


The HUB4 communicates with the Routing shelf complex units and the Management
Complex to set the TRANSP and ICI LED.

15.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 7.2 watts
■ Maximum: 11.2 watts

15.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the HUBR (HUB4) unit are set during provisioning
and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform
any optioning activities when replacing a HUBR (HUB4) unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270,
System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of provisioning options.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


15-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 15
HUBR (HUB4) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

15.6 Front-Panel Description


Table 15-2 [p. 15-5] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.

Table 15-2: HUBR (HUB4) LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

PWR A Green Office power A: normal No office power A


Lamp testa No lamp test

PWR B Green Office power B: normal No office power B


Lamp testb No lamp test

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No alarm


DC–DC converter failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatchc Equipment match

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Poll cell error Polling activity OK


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No poll cell Polling activity OK


yellow

TRANSP Red ICI failure No failure


Fuse failure
DC–DC converter fail
ATM, oscillator fail

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

ICI Red LOS, LOF, LOP, L-AIS, No alarms on ICI


BERSD-L, BERSF-L, L-RDI,
P-AIS, P-RDI

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test


a Does not light if office battery feed A is not present.
b Does not light if office battery feed B is not present.
c
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

Figure 15-2 [p. 15-6] shows the front panel of the HUBR (HUB4) unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 15-5
CHAPTER 15
HUBR (HUB4) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

HUB4
FC9511HUB4
SN9360RAAA k Iss.01
FAIL/SVCE

ICI

PWR
A

TRANSP

MAIN A

MAIN B

G
m0914

Figure 15-2: HUBR (HUB4) Unit Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


15-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
16
CHAPTERS HUBX UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 16.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
8 DCC1
16.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 16.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 16.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 16.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
15 HUBR (HUB4)
➤ 16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Overview

16.1 Overview
The HUBx (HUB1, HUB2, HUBL [HUB3], and HUBU [HUB5]) unit and the OH
Processing HEDx unit (HED1 and HED2) provide for the communication of overhead,
alarm, status, and control data between the Management Complex units and the Transport/
Optical Tributary shelf units. The HUBx communicates with the HEDx in the Management
Complex over the intercomplex interface (ICI) link.

The HUB1 and HUB2 units can be used in either the Transport or Optical Tributary shelves.
The HUBL (HUB3) is used only in the Optical Tributary shelves and the HUBU (HUB5) is
used only in the Transport shelves.

Note: For additional information on the HEDx features, refer to Chapter 13 in this practice.

Note: The HED3 and HUBR (HUB4) units (used for ICI link between the Management Complex in
the OC-192 Transport shelf and the transport units in the Routing shelf) are described in
Chapters 14 and 15.

Table 16-1 [p. 16-2] lists the HUBx part numbers and descriptions.

Table 16-1: HUBx Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

HUB1 FC9511HUB1 Management/transport interface for Transport


and Optical Tributary shelves

HUB2 FC9511HUB2 Management/transport interface for Transport


and Optical Tributary shelves

HUBL (HUB3) FC9511HUB3 Management/transport interface for Optical


Tributary shelves only

HUBU (HUB5) FC9511HUB5 Management/transport interface for Transport


shelves only

Table 16-2 [p. 16-2] lists cross-references for additional information on the HUBx unit.

Table 16-2: Additional HUBx Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


16-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Features

Table 16-2: Additional HUBx Unit Information Cross-Reference (Cont.)

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

16.2 Features
The HUBx unit provides the following features:
■ Consolidated communications from transport units to the Management Complex
■ Uses SONET OC-3 and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) over the ICI
■ Priority alarm communications
■ Test jacks for measuring shelf power in HUB1, Issue 08 and later
■ Overhead byte transparency (OHBT) supported in HUBU (HUB5) (Release 5.1
provides software provisioning of OHBT.)

16.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the HUBx plug-in units are listed in Table 16-3 [p. 16-3].

Table 16-3: HUBx Plug-In Units Physical Dimensions

Name Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

HUB1, HUB2, HUBL (HUB3) 22 265 230

HUBU (HUB5) 26 265 230

16.4 Functional Description


This section provides a functional description of the communication link provided by the
HUBx unit and describes the LED control function of the unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 16-3
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Functional Description

16.4.1 Communication Link


Figure 16-1 [p. 16-4] is a simplified block diagram of the HUBx unit.

Management
Complex
Interface ICI To/from
(to Units) Interface OC-3
HEDx
OC-3 ATM
Alarms HUB
(from Units)

Overhead
Data
(from Units)
FAIL/SVCE

ICI

System Unit TRANSP


Clocks Control

RING SW

APS DEF
PWR A To Circuitry
Power
PWR A

d7074.fh8_2
Converter
PWR B
PWR B

Figure 16-1: HUBx Unit Simplified Block Diagram

The HUBx, along with the HEDx, serves as “network control” for data communication
between the Management Complex units and the transport units. The following data are
transferred through the HUBx unit.

The SONET overhead bytes, which are carried between the OC-192, OC-48, OC-12,
and OC-3 lines and the Management Complex units

Alarm/status information from the transport units

Control information from the Management Complex

The ICI link consists of the alarm, status, control, and overhead data mapped to ATM cells,
which are transmitted over an OC-3 optical link (low power). The ICI link communicates
between the HUBx and HEDx.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


16-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Options

The HUBx prioritizes communications as follows:


■ First, “high priority” alarm and status messages are communicated at set intervals.
■ Next, overhead data is sent with higher priority than status or control information.
■ Finally, status and control information is communicated.

16.4.2 LED Control


The HUBx communicates with the Transport Complex units and the Management Complex
to set the TRANSP, APS DEF, ICI, and RING SW LEDs.

16.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit.
Table 16-4 [p. 16-5] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 16-4: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


HUB1/2 12.4 13.3

HUBL (HUB3) 8.5 11.4

HUBU (HUB5) 15.4 19.2

16.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the HUBx unit are set during provisioning and are
stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing a HUBx unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of provisioning options.

16.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 16-2 [p. 16-6] shows the front panels of the HUBx units. Figure 16-3 [p. 16-7] shows
the location of the on/off switch for OHBT for HUBU (HUB5).

Note: For Release 5.1 and later, OHBT is supported by software provisioning that overwrites the
switch setting.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 16-5
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FC9511HUB5
FAIL/SVCE

ICI

APS DEF
FAIL/SVCE FAIL/SVCE

RING SW
ICI ICI

APS DEF APS DEF

RING SW RING SW
PWR A

PWR B

TRANSP

PWR PWR
A A MAIN
A
B B
MAIN
B
TRANSP TRANSP
G

MAIN A
MAIN B
HUB1
HUB1

G
HUBU

m1223.fh8_3
d7027

m0538

Note: HUB1-I08 (HUB1 unit, Issue 8), shown above, center, is identical to HUB1-I07 (above, left), but
also has voltage test points on the front face. HUB2 and HUBL (HUB3) have front-panel features
similar to HUB1-I08. Note that the HU5) unit (above, right) has the label “HUBU” on the front panel.

Figure 16-2: HUBx Unit Front Panels

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


16-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

OFF

OHBT
ON

OPT IN

OPT OUT

m1395.fh10_2

Figure 16-3: HUBU (HUB5) OHBT On/Off Switch Location

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 16-7
CHAPTER 16
HUBx Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 16-5 [p. 16-8] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.

Table 16-5: HUBx LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation


PWR A Green Office power A: normal No office power A
Lamp testa No lamp test

PWR B Green Office power B: normal No office power B


Lamp testb No lamp test

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No alarm


DC–DC converter failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatchc Equipment match

Green In service, active N/A

Yellow Poll cell error Polling activity OK


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No poll cell Polling activity OK


yellow

TRANSP Red ICI failure No failure


Fuse failure
DC–DC converter fail
ATM, oscillator fail

Tributary or high-speed (HS) line alarm No alarm on trib or HS line

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test


OC-192, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3, or intershelf link No failure
failure

ICI Red LOS, LOF, LOP, L-AIS, BERSD-L, BERSF-L, No alarms on ICI
L-RDI, P-AIS, P-RDI

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

APS DEF Red Automatic protection switching (APS) defect APS OK


Lamp test No lamp test

RING SW Green Ring switch protection activated Protection switch idle


Lamp test No lamp test
a Does not light if office battery feed A is not present.
b
Does not light if office battery feed B is not present.
c
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


16-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
17
CHAPTERS FLASH MEMORY (MEM1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 17.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
8 DCC1
17.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 17.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 17.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
13 HED1/HED2
17.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 17.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
16 HUBx
➤ 17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 17
Flash Memory (MEM1) Unit Description
Overview

17.1 Overview
The Flash Memory (MEM1) unit contains the main data storage for the FLASH®-192
Management Complex. It provides DRAM for use by the CPUs in the system for temporary
storage of data. In addition, this unit provides active and standby Flash memory. The part
number for this unit is FC9511MEM1.

Table 17-1 [p. 17-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 17-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

17.2 Features
The MEM1 unit provides the following features:
■ DRAM for temporary data storage
■ Active and standby Flash memory for system software

17.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the MEM1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 18 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

17.4 Functional Description


Figure 17-1 [p. 17-3] is a functional block diagram of the MEM1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


17-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 17
Flash Memory (MEM1) Unit Description
Functional Description

DRAM

UNIVERSAL
ACCESS
BUS

Flash
Active

Flash
Standby

SWDL
CPU
IF

d7077.5
FAIL/SVCE

Figure 17-1: MEM1 Simplified Block Diagram

17.4.1 Memory
Temporary storage of data by the system CPUs is provided by the DRAM accessible via the
32-bit universal access bus (UAB). Also, the RAM disk for software download (SWDL) and
the working provisioning database is provided by the DRAM.

Flash memory is provided for backup storage of the operating software. The active Flash
memory contains a copy of the software that is currently being used by the processors on
CPUs, Craft Interface units (CRFs), and Data Communications Channel (DCC) units. The
standby Flash memory is used for storage of a copy of the previous version of operating
software for the system. When new software is downloaded to the system, it is stored in the
standby Flash memory. Upon activation of the new software, the roles of the active and
standby memories are reversed.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 17-3
CHAPTER 17
Flash Memory (MEM1) Unit Description
Options

17.4.2 Unit Power


This unit is powered by the PWR1 power converter in the Transport shelf. The typical and
maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:

Typical: 7.2 watts
■ Maximum: 9.5 watts

17.5 Options
There are no provisioning options that affect the operation of the MEM1. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing a MEM1. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270,
System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on all provisioning options.

17.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 17-2 [p. 17-5] shows the front panel of the MEM1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


17-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 17
Flash Memory (MEM1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

SWDL
MEM1

d7030

Figure 17-2: MEM1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 17-5
CHAPTER 17
Flash Memory (MEM1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 17-2 [p. 17-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the MEM1.

Table 17-2: MEM1 LED Indicators

Condition for Deactiva-


Name Color Condition for Activation
tion

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment fail No alarm

Blinking Equipment mismatcha Equipment match


red

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test

SWDL Green Download in progress to RAM disk No download


MEM1 Flash memory is being loaded from
RAM disk
MEM1 Flash memory is being loaded from/
to another unit

Yellow Flash memory bank error Flash memory bank OK

Lamp test No lamp test

Red No valid operational software Valid load OK


a
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


17-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
18
CHAPTERS OC-48 INTERFACE (MMX1/MSXN/
1 Introduction MMNN) UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 18.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
8 DCC1
18.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 18.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 18.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
13 HED1/HED2
18.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-10
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 18.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
➤ 18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Overview

18.1 Overview
The MMx1, MSxn, or MMnn unit is the OC-48 interfaces in the FLASH®-192 system. The
MMx1 units contain long-reach optics and are used in both the OC-192 Transport shelf and
the Optical Tributary shelf. The MMnn units are the Narrowband OC-48 interface units in
the FLASH-192 system. The MMnn units produce an ITU-compliant OC-48 long-reach
optical signal that is compatible with the FLASHWAVE® 7100 wavelength division
multiplexing (WDM) systems. The MSx1 units contain short-reach optics and are used in the
OC-192 Transport shelf or Optical Tributary shelf. The MSx2 units contain short-reach
optics and are used in the Optical Tributary shelf only. The MxS2 is required in the Optical
Tributary shelf for subtending ring configurations.

Note: The MSx2 unit is for use in the Optical Tributary shelf only, and must not be used in the
OC-192 Transport shelf because of power requirements.

Note: The MMx5 and MSx5 are covered in Chapter 19.

The OC-48 Interface units (MMx1 or MSx1) in the OC-192 Transport shelf serve as the
OC-48 tributary interfaces for FLASH-192 systems without a Routing shelf. The MMx1 and
MSx2 units in the Optical Tributary shelf provide multiplexing/demultiplexing to the OC-12
and OC-3 levels. In FLASH-192 systems with a Routing shelf, the MMx1 and MSxn units
interface with NFR1 units in the Routing shelf to provide unrestricted time-slot assignment
(TSA) capability.

In a 0:2 dual-working system configuration, there is only a single input to the MMx1 or
MSx1 unit from a single DMS1 or DMS2; therefore, no traffic selection takes place in the
MMx1 or MSx1 unit. The signal received from the DMS1 or DMS2 unit is passed through
the STS-48 pointer processor, where it is synchronized to the system master clock.

The Narrowband OC-48 Interface units (MMnn) are used in the OC-192 Transport shelf
only. These units serve as the OC-48 tributary interfaces for FLASH-192 systems. There are
19 units in the MMnn series, and their output wavelengths correspond to the ITU 0.8-nm
(100-GHz) spacing standard ITU channels 98, 01, 03, 05, 07, 09, 11, 13, 15, 17, 23, 25, 27,
29, 31, 33, 35, 37, and 39.

Throughout the remainder of this section, “MMx1” represents MMx1, MMnn, MSx1, or
MSx2.

The MMx1 units also provide the protection switching for most of the network applications
and can provide a terminal TSA function on a TSAx48 basis. Each unit handles 48 STS-1
channels, with paired units supporting both working and protection traffic in many of the
network applications.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


18-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Overview

Table 18-1 [p. 18-3] lists the MMx1 and MSxn unit versions covered in this section.

Table 18-1: MMx1 and MSxn Unit Versions

Unit Connector
Application Reach Part Number
Name Type

MMS1 Transport or Optical Tributary shelf Medium SC FC9511MMS1

MMF1 Transport or Optical Tributary shelf Medium FC FC9511MMF1

MMT1 Transport or Optical Tributary shelf Medium ST FC9511MMT1

MSS1 Transport or Optical Tributary shelf Short SC FC9511MSS1

MSF1 Transport or Optical Tributary shelf Short FC FC9511MSF1

MST1 Transport or Optical Tributary shelf Short ST FC9511MST1

MSS2 Optical Tributary shelf Short SC FC9511MSS2

MSF2 Optical Tributary shelf Short FC FC9511MSF2

MST2 Optical Tributary shelf Short ST FC9511MST2

Table 18-2 [p. 18-3] lists the MMnn narrowband unit versions covered in this section. These
units require an in-line optical adapter kit for either SC, FC, or ST connection (refer to
FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Table 2-6 [p. 2-15]).

Table 18-2: MMnn Narrowband Unit Versions

Unit Name Wavelength (nm) Part Number

MM98 1528.77 FC9511MM98

MM01 1530.33 FC9511MM01

MM03 1531.90 FC9511MM03

MM05 1533.47 FC9511MM05

MM07 1535.04 FC9511MM07

MM09 1536.61 FC9511MM09

MM11 1538.19 FC9511MM11

MM13 1539.77 FC9511MM13

MM15 1541.35 FC9511MM15

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 18-3
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Overview

Table 18-2: MMnn Narrowband Unit Versions (Cont.)

Unit Name Wavelength (nm) Part Number

MM17 1542.94 FC9511MM17

MM23 1547.72 FC9511MM23

MM25 1549.32 FC9511MM25

MM27 1550.92 FC9511MM27

MM29 1552.52 FC9511MM29

MM31 1554.13 FC9511MM31

MM33 1555.75 FC9511MM33

MM35 1557.36 FC9511MM35

MM37 1558.98 FC9511MM37

MM39 1560.61 FC9511MM39

Table 18-3 [p. 18-4] lists cross-references for additional information on these units.

Table 18-3: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


18-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Features

18.2 Features
The MMx1, MSxn, and MMnn units have the following features:
■ Termination and generation of the line and section overhead of the OC-48 signal

OC-48 tributary interfaces in the OC-192 Transport shelf
■ OC-48 interfaces on the “high-speed” side of the Optical Tributary shelf

Equipment and line protection switching
■ TSA capabilities (TSAx48) (terminal)
■ Capability to provision individual time slots as service selectors
■ Pointer processing
■ Multiplexing/demultiplexing to the OC-12 and OC-3 level in the Optical Tributary
shelf
■ Timing interfaces for downstream and system timing functions

18.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the MMx1, MSxn, and MMnn plug-in units are as follows:
■ Width: 36 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

18.4 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the MMx1, MSxn, and MMnn
units.

18.4.1 OC-192 Transport Shelf Applications


Figure 18-1 [p. 18-6] is a simplified block diagram of the MMx1 unit for OC-192 Transport
shelf applications.

Note: MSx2 cannot be used in OC-192 Transport shelf for power reasons.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 18-5
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Functional Description

From • Time To
Selection Pointer •
DMS1 • Slot Distribution • MXS1
(1+1 only) Processing
Units • Assignment • Units

Pointer
Processing

Overhead Data
(to HUBx) OC-48 OC-48
Overhead Data Demux Mux
(from HUBx)

OC-48
Parallel
Framing and
to
Serial to
Serial
Parallel

Optical Electrical
Clock to to
Out Electrical Optical

OC-48 OC-48
Optical Optical
System To Input Output
Clock Circuitry
To Circuitry ON-LINE R

ON-LINE S
Management Unit
Complex LINE
Control
Interface
(HUBx Unit) PATH

PATH
PWR A
FAIL/SVCE
Power
d7071.fh8_3

Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 18-1: MMx1 Unit Simplified Block Diagram for OC-192 Transport Shelf Applications

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


18-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Functional Description

Receive Direction (from OC-192 Receiver and Demultiplexer)

For 1+1 systems, traffic from the DMS1 and DMS2 units is selected by the selection section
for processing by the MMx1 unit. Selection of traffic groups under control of the
Management Complex provides line protection and provides the underlying configuration for
facility protection. Traffic from the selection section is passed through the STS-48 pointer
processor, where it is synchronized to the system master clock.

After passing through the pointer processors, the signals are routed to the TSA section. The
TSA section provides internal TSA circuitry, which can route selected STS channels out to the
OC-48 tributary interfaces and can pass selected channels to the distribution section. In
addition, the TSA circuitry accepts the STS inputs from the OC-48 tributary inputs and
inserts them into the appropriate time slots in the outgoing connections to the distribution
section.

The distribution section distributes the STS time slots from the TSA section to the MXS1
and MXS2 units.

Traffic from the tributary output side of the TSA section is passed into the OC-48 interface
section, where the appropriate section and line overhead bytes are added. The signal is
converted to a serial data stream and transmitted out the OC-48 interface.

Transmit Direction (to Multiplexer and OC-192 Transmitter)

The incoming OC-48 tributary signal is converted to a serial electrical signal and then
processed by the OC-48 interface section. Framing is located and loss of frame (LOF) and loss
of signal (LOS) are monitored in the OC-48 interface. The overhead is accessed and signal fail
(SF) and signal degrade (SD) conditions are monitored. The section and line overhead is
passed to the Management Complex. The signal is then pointer processed to allow alignment
with the system master clock and passed to the TSA section for selection and routing.

The TSA section provides internal TSA circuitry, which can route selected STS channels to
the OC-48 tributary interfaces and can pass selected channels to the distribution section. The
distribution section distributes the STS time slots from the TSA section to the MXS1/MXS2
units.

18.4.2 Optical Tributary Shelf Applications


Figure 18-2 [p. 18-8] is a simplified block diagram of the MMx1 unit for Optical Tributary
shelf applications.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 18-7
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Functional Description

4 X (12 STS-1s) Time 4 X (12 STS-1s)


Selection Pointer
Slot Distribution
from C2x1 Units (1+1 only) Processing to C2x1 Units
Assignment

Pointer
Processing

OC-48 OC-48
Demux Mux

OC-48
Parallel
Framing and
to
Serial to
Serial
Parallel

Optical Electrical
Clock
to to
Out
Electrical Optical

OC-48 OC-48
Optical Input from Optical Output to
MMx1 in OC-192 MMx1 in OC-192
System To Transport Shelf Transport Shelf
Clock Circuitry

To Circuitry
ON-LINE R

ON-LINE S
Management Unit
Complex LINE
Control
Interface
PATH
(HUBx Unit)
PATH
PWR A
d7834.fh8_3

FAIL/SVCE
Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 18-2: MMx1 Unit Simplified Block Diagram for Optical Tributary Shelf Applications

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


18-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Functional Description

Receive Direction (from MMx1 Unit in OC-192 Transport Shelf)

Traffic from the corresponding MMx1 unit in the OC-192 Transport shelf is received via an
OC-48 signal. The incoming OC-48 signal is converted to a serial electrical signal and then
processed by the OC-48 interface section. Framing is located and the signal is then pointer
processed to allow alignment with the system master clock and demultiplexed into groups of
STS-1 signals, dependant on the tributary interface (OC-3, OC-12, or OC-48). Each group
of STS-1 signals is bridged and sent electrically to two interface units (3xx1, C2x1, or C8x1)
in the Optical Tributary shelf.

Note: MSx2 units must be used in the Optical Tributary shelf when configured with OC-3
tributary interface units.

Transmit Direction (to MMx1 Unit in OC-192 Transport Shelf)

For 1+1 systems, traffic from the Optical Tributary (Cnx1 or 3xx1) Interface units is selected
by the selection section for processing by the MMx1 or MSxn unit. Selection of traffic groups
under control of the Management Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf provides line
protection and provides the underlying configuration for facility protection. Traffic from the
selection section is multiplexed to the STS-48 level and passed through the STS-48 pointer
processor, where it is synchronized to the system master clock.

The TSA circuitry accepts the STS-48 input from the pointer processor and inserts it into the
appropriate time slots in the outgoing connection to the distribution section.

Traffic from the tributary output side of the TSA section is passed into the OC-48 interface
section. The signal is converted to a serial data stream and transmitted out the OC-48
interface to the corresponding MMx1 or MSx1 unit in the OC-192 Transport shelf.

18.4.3 Common Features


The common features include monitor/control features and power requirements.

Monitor and Control

Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

Unit Power

Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit.
Table 18-4 [p. 18-10] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 18-9
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Options

Table 18-4: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


MMx1 48.5 60.7

MSx2 58.8 73.7

MST1 48.0 60.0

MMnn 48.0 60.0

18.4.4 Optical Specifications


Table 18-5 [p. 18-10] lists the optical transmit and receive parameters for the OC-48 interface
units.

Table 18-5: OC-48 Optical Parameters for MMx1/MSx1/MSx2/MMx5/MSx5/MMnn Units

Parameter MMx1/MMx5 MSx1/MSx2/MSx5 MMnn

Center wavelength 1285 to 1330 nm 1266 to 1360 nm 1528.77 to


1560.61 nm

Transmit level Maximum –2.0 dBm –10 dBm –2.0 dBm

Minimum +3.0 dBm –3 dBm +3.0 dBm

Receive level Maximum –8.0 dBm –3.0 dBm –8.0 dBm

Minimum –29 dBm –18.0 dBm –28.0 dBm

18.4.5 Application with Routing Shelf


In systems configured with a Routing shelf, the MMx1/MSxn unit function is the same,
except the MMx1 units interface with NFR1 units in the Routing shelf.

18.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the MMx1, MSxn, and MMnn units are set during
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing an MMx1, MSxn, or MMnn unit. Refer
to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on
provisioning options.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


18-10 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

18.6 Front-Panel Description


Table 18-6 [p. 18-11] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 18-6: MMx1/MSxn/MMnn Unit LED Indicators

Condition for
Name Color Condition for Activation
Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Reda Equipment failure No failure


DC-DC conversion failure

Blinking reda Equipment mismatchb Equipment match

Greena In service, active In service, standby/


OOS

Yellow Polling cell errora No error


Loss of communications with OC-192 Communications
Transport shelf or loss of communications active
with Optical Tributary shelfc

Lamp testa No lamp test

Blinking yellowa No polling cell Polling cell OK

PATH (future) Yellowa Lamp test No lamp test

LINE Redd LOS: Tributary side No alarm


LOF: Tributary side
L-AIS: Tributary side
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Le (See Caution footnote.)

Yellowa Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE S Greena Tributary send side active Tributary send side


inactive

Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE R Greena Tributary receive side active Tributary receive side


inactive

Lamp test No lamp test


a For both MMx1 units connected to OC-48 NEs or MMx1 units used for intershelf connections
b
Equipment mismatch indicates provisioned information and unit installed in the slot do not match.
c
Only applicable for MMx1 units used for intershelf connections
d
Only applicable for MMx1 units connected to OC-48 NEs

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 18-11
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

e Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream
site relative to this unit.

Figure 18-3 [p. 18-13] shows the front panel of the MMx1 unit (MSxn and MMnn similar).

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


18-12 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 18
OC-48 Interface (MMx1/MSxn/MMnn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors
when uncoupled
AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE
TO BEAM

FAIL/SVCE
PATH
OC-48/INTCON

LINE
PATH
ON LINE S
ON LINE R
d7028

MMx1

Figure 18-3: MMx1 Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 18-13
19
CHAPTERS OC-48/OC-48C INTERFACE
1 Introduction (MMX5/MSX5) UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 19.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
8 DCC1
19.2 Unit Optical Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 19.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 19.4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
13 HED1/HED2
19.5 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 19.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
16 HUBx
17 MEM1 19.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
➤ 19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Overview

19.1 Overview
The MMx5 and MSx5 units provide the OC-48 and OC-48c interface for the FLASH®-192
system. The MMx5 units contain long-reach optics; the MSx5 units contain short-reach
optics.

The MMx5 and MSx5 units provide the protection switching for most of the network
applications and can provide a terminal time-slot assignment (TSA) function on a TSAx48
basis. Each unit handles 48 STS-1 channels, with paired units supporting both working and
protection traffic in many of the network applications.

In a 0:2 dual-working system configuration, there is only a single input to the MMx5 or
MSx5 unit from a single DMS1 or DMS2; therefore, no traffic selection takes place in the
MMx5 or MSx5 unit. The signal received from the DMS1 or DMS2 unit is passed through
the STS-48 pointer processor, where it is synchronized to the system master clock.

The MMx5and MSx5 units support drop and continue over protect (DCP) in
2-fiber bidirectional line-switched ring (2F-BLSR) configurations, only.

Table 19-1 [p. 19-2] lists the MMx5 and MSx5 part numbers and descriptions.

Table 19-1: MMx5/MSx5 Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

MMF5 FC9511MMF5 Long-reach OC-48/OC-48c interface with FC connector

MMS5 FC9511MMS5 Long-reach OC-48/OC-48c interface with SC connector

MMT5 FC9511MMT5 Long-reach OC-48/OC-48c interface with ST connector

MSF5 FC9511MSF5 Short-reach OC-48/OC-48c interface with FC connector

MSS5 FC9511MSS5 Short-reach OC-48/OC-48c interface with SC connector

MST5 FC9511MST5 Short-reach OC-48/OC-48c interface with ST connector

Table 19-2 [p. 19-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 19-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


19-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Unit Optical Power Specifications

Table 19-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference (Cont.)

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

19.2 Unit Optical Power Specifications


Table 19-3 [p. 19-3] lists the MMx5 and MSx5 units optical power specifications.

Table 19-3: MMx5 and MSx5 Units Power Specifications

Description MMx5 MSx5

Transmit power output (dBm, minimum) –2.0 –10.0

Transmit power output (dBm, +3.0 –3.0


maximum)

Receive level (dBm, minimum) –27.0 –18.0

Receive level (dBm, maximum) –9.0 –3.0

19.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the MMx5 and MSx5 plug-in units are as follows:
■ Width: 36 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 19-3
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Features

19.4 Features
The MMx5 or MSx5 unit provides the following features:
■ Termination and generation of the line and section overhead of the STS-48c signal

STS-48c tributary interfaces in the OC-192 Transport shelf
■ Equipment and line protection switching

TSA capabilities (TSAx48) (terminal)
■ Capability to provision individual time slots as service selectors
■ Pointer processing
■ Timing interfaces for downstream and system timing functions
■ Drop and Continue over Protect in 2F-BLSR

19.5 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the MMx5 and MSx5 units.

19.5.1 OC-192 Transport Shelf Applications


Figure 19-1 [p. 19-5] is a simplified block diagram of the MMx5 or MSx5 unit for OC-192
Transport shelf applications.

Receive Direction (from OC-192 Receiver and Demultiplexer)

For 1+1 systems, traffic from the DMS1 and DMS2 units is selected by the selection section
for processing by the MMx5 or MSx5 unit. Selection of traffic groups under control of the
Management Complex provides line protection and provides the underlying configuration for
facility protection. Traffic from the selection section is passed through the STS-48 pointer
processor, where it is synchronized to the system master clock.

After passing through the pointer processors, the signals are routed to the TSA section. The
TSA section provides internal TSA circuitry, which can route selected STS channels out to the
OC-48 tributary interfaces and can pass selected channels to the distribution section. In
addition, the TSA circuitry accepts the STS inputs from the OC-48 tributary inputs and
inserts them into the appropriate time slots in the outgoing connections to the distribution
section.

The distribution section distributes the STS time slots from the TSA section to the MXS1/
MXS2 units.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


19-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Functional Description

Figure 19-1: MMx5 or MSx5 Unit Simplified Block Diagram for OC-192 Transport Shelf Applications

Traffic from the tributary output side of the TSA section is passed into the OC-48 interface
section, where the appropriate section and line overhead bytes are added. The signal is
converted to a serial data stream and transmitted out the OC-48 interface.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 19-5
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Functional Description

Transmit Direction (to Multiplexer and OC-192 Transmitter)

The incoming OC-48 tributary signal is converted to a serial electrical signal and then
processed by the OC-48 interface section. Framing is located and loss of frame (LOF) and loss
of signal (LOS) are monitored in the OC-48 interface. The overhead is accessed and signal fail
(SF) and signal degrade (SD) conditions are monitored. The section overhead and line
overhead are passed to the Management Complex. The signal is then pointer processed to
allow alignment with the system master clock and passed to the TSA section for selection and
routing.

The TSA section provides internal TSA circuitry, which can route selected STS channels to
the OC-48 tributary interfaces and can pass selected channels to the distribution section. The
distribution section distributes the STS time slots from the TSA section to the MXS1/MXS2
units.

19.5.2 Applications with Optical Tributary Shelf


Figure 19-2 [p. 19-7] is a simplified block diagram of the MMx5 or MSx5 unit for
applications with the Optical Tributary shelf.

Receive Direction (from MMx5 or MSx5 Unit in OC-192 Transport Shelf)

Traffic from the corresponding MMx5 or MSx5 unit in the OC-192 Transport shelf is
received via an OC-48 signal. The incoming OC-48 signal is converted to a serial electrical
signal and then processed by the OC-48 interface section. Framing is located and the signal is
then pointer processed to allow alignment with the system master clock and demultiplexed
into groups of STS-1 signals, dependant on the tributary interface (OC-3, OC-12, or
OC-48). Each group of STS-1 signals is bridged and sent electrically to two interface units
(3xx1, C2x1, or C8x1) in the Optical Tributary shelf.

Note: MSx2 units must be used in the Optical Tributary shelf when configured with OC-3
tributary interface units.

Transmit Direction (to MMx5 or MSx5 Unit in OC-192 Transport Shelf)

For 1+1 systems, traffic from the Optical Tributary (Cnx1 or 3xx1) Interface units is selected
by the selection section for processing by the MMx5 or MSx5 unit. Selection of traffic groups
under control of the Management Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf provides line
protection and provides the underlying configuration for facility protection. Traffic from the
selection section is multiplexed to the STS-48 level and passed through the STS-48 pointer
processor, where it is synchronized to the system master clock.

The TSA circuitry accepts the STS-48 input from the pointer processor and inserts it into the
appropriate time slots in the outgoing connection to the distribution section.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


19-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Functional Description

Figure 19-2: MMx5 or MSx5 Unit Simplified Block Diagram for Applications
with Optical Tributary Shelf

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 19-7
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Options

Traffic from the tributary output side of the TSA section is passed into the OC-48 interface
section. The signal is converted to a serial data stream and transmitted out the OC-48
interface to the corresponding MMx5 or MSx5 unit in the OC-192 Transport shelf.

19.5.3 Common Applications (OC-192 Transport Shelf


and Optical Tributary Shelf)
The common features include monitor/control features and power requirements.

Monitor and Control

Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel. The MICOM section provides the interface to the
Management Complex and the various sections within the DMx1/DMS2 module.

Parity lines are provided with the data between sections. The parity bits appearing on these
lines are checked at each section and parity errors are reported to the MICOM section.

Unit Power

Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 31.3 watts
■ Maximum: 41.9 watts

19.5.4 Applications with Routing Shelf


In systems configured with a Routing shelf, the MMx5/MSx5 unit function is the same,
except the units interface with NFR1 units in the Routing shelf.

19.6 Options
All options affecting the operation of the MMx5 and MSx5 units are set during provisioning
and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform
any optioning activities when replacing an MMx5 or MSx5 unit. Refer to
FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on
provisioning options.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


19-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

19.7 Front-Panel Description


Figure 19-3 [p. 19-10] shows the front panel of the MMx5 unit; the MSx5 is similar.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 19-9
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Figure 19-3: MMx5 Unit Front Panel (MSx5 Similar)

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


19-10 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 19-4 [p. 19-11] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 19-4: MMx5/MSx5 Unit LED Indicators

Condition for
Name Color Condition for Activation
Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Reda Equipment failure No failure


DC-DC conversion failure

Blinking reda Equipment mismatchb Equipment match

Greena In service, active In service, standby/


OOS

Yellow Polling cell errora No error


Loss of communications with OC-192 Communications
Transport shelf or loss of communications active
with Optical Tributary shelfc

Lamp testa No lamp test

Blinking yellowa No polling cell Polling cell OK

PATH (future) Yellowa Lamp test No lamp test

LINE Redd LOS: Tributary side No alarm


LOF: Tributary side
L-AIS: Tributary side
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Le (See Caution footnote.)

Yellowa Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE S Greena Tributary send side active Tributary send side


inactive

Lamp test No lamp test

ON LINE R Greena Tributary receive side active Tributary receive side


inactive

Lamp test No lamp test


a For MMx5 and MSx5 units connected to OC-48 network elements (NEs) or MMx5 and MSx5 units used for
intershelf connections
b Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
c
Only applicable for MMx5 and MSx5 units used for intershelf connections
d
Only applicable for MMx5 and MSx5 units connected to OC-48 NEs

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 19-11
CHAPTER 19
OC-48/OC-48c Interface (MMx5/MSx5) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

e Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream
site relative to this unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


19-12 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
20
CHAPTERS 10-GB/S MULTIPLEXER (MXR1, MXS1,
1 Introduction MXS2) UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 20.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
8 DCC1
20.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 20.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 20.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
13 HED1/HED2
20.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 20.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-7
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
➤ 20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Overview

20.1 Overview
The 10-Gb/s Multiplexer unit exists in three forms: the MXR1 unit, used in the regenerator
application; the MXS1 unit, used in nonregenerator configurations without forward error
correction (FEC); and the MXS2 unit, used in nonregenerator configurations with FEC. All
three units provide the multiplexing function that produces the SONET STS-192 sent to the
OC-192 optical transmitter units. One MXx1 or MXS2 unit is used for each OC-192 line
terminated by the system.

Table 20-1 [p. 20-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 20-1: Multiplexer Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

MXR1 FC9511MXR1 10-Gb/s Multiplexer unit (regenerator, Releases 2.3, 2.3.1, 5.1.x and
5.2.x only)

MXS1 FC9511MXS1 10-Gb/s Multiplexer unit

MXS2 FC9511MXS2 10-Gb/s Multiplexer unit with FEC

Table 20-2 [p. 20-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 20-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

20.2 Features
The following subsections provide feature descriptions of the 10-Gb/s Multiplexer unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


20-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

20.2.1 MXR1 Features


The MXR1 (multiplexer-regenerator) unit provides the following specific features:
■ Adds section overhead to the signals received from the 10-Gb/s Demultiplexer unit
(DMR1)
■ Produces the multiplexed STS-192 signal for the OC-192 Transmitter (Txxn) unit

20.2.2 MXS1 Features


The MXS1 (multiplexer-standard) unit provides the following specific features:
■ Selects either the active or standby MMx1 output signals for processing (1+1 only)

Adds section and line overhead to the signals
■ Produces the multiplexed STS-192 signal for the OC-192 Transmitter (Txxn) unit

20.2.3 MXS2 Features


The MXS2 (multiplexer-standard) unit provides the following specific features:
■ Selects either the active or standby MMx1 output signals for processing (1+1 only)
■ Adds section and line overhead to the signals
■ Produces the multiplexed STS-192 signal for the OC-192 Transmitter (Txxn) unit
■ Provides FEC to improve the bit error rate of the FLASH®-192 optical transmission of
the SONET payload
■ Supports STS-48c signal format
■ Supports overhead byte (OHB) transparency, which allows the FLASH-192 NE to
forward tributary traffic without processing SONET section and line overhead

20.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the MXR1, MXS1, and MXS2 plug-in units are listed in
Table 20-3 [p. 20-3].

Table 20-3: MXR1, MXS1, and MXS2 Plug-In Units Physical Dimensions

Name Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

MXS1, MXR1 36 265 230

MXS2 36 265 212

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 20-3
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

20.4 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the 10-Gb/s Multiplexer unit.

20.4.1 MXR1 Unit


Figure 20-1 [p. 20-4] is a simplified block diagram of the MXR1 unit.

The MXR1 unit accepts demultiplexed signals from the DMR1 unit, inserts the section
overhead, and multiplexes the SONET stream into an STS-192 signal, which is then sent to
the OC-192 Transmitter (Txxn) unit. The MXR1 unit is used only in the regenerator
application (Releases 2.3 and 2.3.1 only).

From
Demux • To
(DMR1 Unit) • Transmitter
Section
Through • (Txxn Unit)
Generation
Backplane •
Cables •

Overhead
Data
from HUB1

Management
Complex Unit
Interface Control
(HUBx)

FAIL/SVCE

PWR A
d7067.fh8_3

Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 20-1: MXR1 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


20-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

20.4.2 MXS1 Unit


Figure 20-2 [p. 20-5] is the simplified block diagram of the MXS1/MSX2 unit.

• • Mux
From • To
• Working/Protect Line and
MMx1 • Transmitter
• Selection Section
Units • (Txxn Unit)
• (1+1 only) Overhead
• • Generation

Overhead
Data
from HUBx

38.88 Mb/s
Sync

Management
Complex Unit Control
Interface
(HUBx)

FAIL/SVCE

d7068.fh8_3
Power
Converter
B To Circuitry

Figure 20-2: MXS1/MXS2 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

The inputs to the MXS1 unit are the component STS signals from the MMx1 units in the
shelf. There is one MMx1 unit for each incoming OC-48 line. A parity check is included with
the STS signal to check for data errors between the MMx1 units and the MXS1.

The MXS1 uses a selector when the MMx1 OC-48 interfaces are 1+1 protected to select
either the working or protect STS signals from the respective MMx1 units. In the
dual-working mode (0:2), the MXS1 maps the STS signals from the assigned MMx1 units.

The multiplexing circuits then time-division multiplex the STS signals into the SONET
STS-192 signal format and insert the section and line overhead into the SONET bit stream.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 20-5
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Functional Description

Unit control interface is provided between the Hub unit (HUB1, HUB2, HUBL [HUB3],
and HUBU [HUB5]) and MXS1 units for communications with the Management Complex.
This interface accepts control message inputs from the HUB unit to provision the unit,
operate switches, insert overhead data into the SONET bit stream, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel. The HUB interface also allows the MXS1 unit to report
circuit and signal failures to the Management Complex.

Synchronization of the multiplexing stages is controlled by the system clock, which is


distributed by the Synchronization Control Unit (SCU1). Switching between the primary
and secondary master synchronization clock inputs is controlled by hardware.

20.4.3 MXS2 Unit


Figure 20-2 [p. 20-5] shows the simplified block diagram of the MXS2 unit.

The inputs to the MXS2 unit are the component STS signals from the MMx1 units in the
shelf. There is one MMx1 unit for each incoming OC-48 line. A parity check is included with
the STS signal to check for data errors between the MMx1 units and the MXS2.

The MXS2 uses a selector when the MMx1 OC-48 interfaces are 1+1 protected to select
either the working or protect STS signals from the respective MMx1 units. In the
dual-working mode (0:2), the MXS2 maps the STS signals from the assigned MMx1 units.

The MXS2 can enable or disable the FEC feature on the transmit side of the OC-192 facility.
When FEC is enabled, the MXS2 generates the FEC code words and stores them in the line
overhead.

The multiplexing circuits then time-division multiplex the STS signals into the SONET
STS-192 signal format and insert the section and line overhead into the SONET bit stream.

Unit control interface is provided between the Hub unit (HUB1, HUB2, HUBL [HUB3],
and HUBU [HUB5]) and MXS2 units for communications with the Management Complex.
This interface accepts control message inputs from the HUB unit to provision the unit,
operate switches, insert overhead data into the SONET bit stream, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel. The HUB unit interface also allows the MXS2 unit to
report circuit and signal failures to the Management Complex.

Synchronization of the multiplexing stages is controlled by the system clock, which is


distributed by the SCU1. Switching between the primary and secondary master
synchronization clock inputs is controlled by hardware.

20.4.4 MXR1 and MXS1/MXS2 Unit Power


The unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Refer to FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, for more
information on FLASH-192 power distribution. Table 20-4 [p. 20-7] lists the typical and
maximum power consumption for these units.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


20-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Options

Table 20-4: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


MXS1 46.2 57.2

MXS2 55.5 72.3

MXR1 11.2 16.1

20.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the MXx1 and MXS2 units are set during provisioning
and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform
any optioning activities when replacing an MXx1 unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on the service state provisioning
options.

20.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 20-3 [p. 20-8] shows the front panels of the MXR1, MXS1, and MXS2 units.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 20-7
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE FAIL/SVCE FAIL/SVCE


d7044

d7024

MXR1 MXS1 MXS2


m0539

Figure 20-3: MXR1, MXS1, and MXS2 Unit Front Panels

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


20-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 20
10-Gb/s Multiplexer (MXR1, MXS1, MXS2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 20-5 [p. 20-9] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 20-5: MXx1/MXS2 Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No alarm


DC–DC converter down
Regenerator cable(s) not in placea Regenerator cable(s) in place

Blinking red Equipment mismatchb Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Poll cell error No errors

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cells


yellow
a Only valid for MXR1 in Regenerator application
b
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 20-9
21
CHAPTERS OC-48 INTERFACE (NFR1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 21.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
8 DCC1
21.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 21.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 21.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3
13 HED1/HED2
21.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 21.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
➤ 21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 21
OC-48 Interface (NFR1) Unit Description
Overview

21.1 Overview
The OC-48 Interface (NFR1) units serve as the OC-48 tributary interfaces between the
Routing shelf and the MMX/MSX units in the OC-192 Transport shelf and the Optical
Tributary shelf. The NFR1 units provide multiplexing/demultiplexing to the STS-1 level. The
part number for this unit is FC9511NFR1.

Table 21-1 [p. 21-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 21-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

21.2 Features
The NFR1 unit provides the following features.

OC-48 tributary interfaces to the OC-192 Transport shelf and Optical Tributary shelf
■ Equipment and line protection switching
■ Capability to provision individual time slots in conjunction with SWR1 units
■ Pointer processing
■ Multiplexing/demultiplexing to the STS-1 level

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


21-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 21
OC-48 Interface (NFR1) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

21.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the NFR1 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 38 mm

Height: 215 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

21.4 Functional Description


The following subsections provide functional descriptions of the NFR1 unit.

21.4.1 Receive Section (from MMx1/MSxn Unit)


The NFR1 unit provides optical-to-electrical conversion of traffic from the OC-48INT
(MMx1 and MSxn) units in the OC-192 Transport shelf and the Optical Tributary shelf.
Section and line overhead (except data communications channel [DCC] and automatic
protection switching [APS]) bytes are processed and passed to the complex management
units. The signal is then pointer processed to allow alignment with the system clock (38.88
MHz) derived from the TCR1 unit. Finally, the STS-48 signal is paralleled to 64 x 311 Mb/s
and transmitted to SWR1 units (colocated in the Routing shelf ).

21.4.2 Transmit Section (to MMx1/MSx2 Unit)


The data stream of 64 x 311 Mb/s is received from the SWR1 and multiplexed to STS-48
signal. Section and line overhead bytes are inserted and
electrical-to-optical conversion is performed. The OC-48 signal is then transmitted out to
OC-48 INT units in the OC-192 Transport shelf or the Optical Tributary shelf.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 21-3
CHAPTER 21
OC-48 Interface (NFR1) Unit Description
Options

21.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 50.6 watts

Maximum: 61.1 watts

21.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the NFR1 units are set during provisioning and are
stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any
optioning activities when replacing an NFR1 unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on provisioning options.

21.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 21-1 [p. 21-5] shows the front panel of the NFR1 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


21-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 21
OC-48 Interface (NFR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

NFR1
FC9511NFR1
SNP6RVOCA k Iss.01
FAIL/SVCE

INTCON1
INTCON2
INTCON3
INTCON4

DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors
when
unplugged.
Avoid direct
exposure to
beam.

Danger
m0919

Figure 21-1: NFR1 Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 21-5
CHAPTER 21
OC-48 Interface (NFR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 21-2 [p. 21-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 21-2: NFR1 Unit LED Indicators

Condition for Deactiva-


Name Color Condition for Activation
tion

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No failure


DC-DC conversion failure

Blinking reda Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No error

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow

INTCON 1, 2, 3, 4 Red LOS, LOF, AIS, BERSF-L, No alarm


BERSD-L No lamp test
Lamp test
a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


21-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
22
CHAPTERS POWER (PWR1) UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 22.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 22.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
8 DCC1
22.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 22.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 22.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 22.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
➤ 22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 22
Power (PWR1) Unit Description
Overview

22.1 Overview
The Power (PWR1) unit converts office battery to the operating voltages required by the
following Management Complex plug-in units: CPU1, CRF1, DCC1, HEDx (HED1,
HED2, and HED3), and MEM1. A single unit is required by each FLASH®-192 shelf. The
part number for this unit is FC9511PWR1.

Table 22-1 [p. 22-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 22-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

22.2 Features
The PWR1 unit provides the following features:
■ Dual inputs for A and B office battery
■ Test points for input and output voltages
■ Overvoltage and overcurrent protection
■ Redundant power supply output circuits on the same unit
■ Alarm circuit indication that one of the power supplies has failed; alarm circuit
available on Transport shelf FC9511SFU1-I05

22.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the PWR1 plug-in unit are as follows:

Width: 34 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


22-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 22
Power (PWR1) Unit Description
Functional Description

22.4 Functional Description


Figure 22-1 [p. 22-3] is a simplified block diagram of the PWR1.

Figure 22-1: PWR1 Simplified Block Diagram

At the input of the unit, the A and B batteries are isolated from each other by C-source
diodes. The input voltage is then filtered to remove any ac components. The positive side of
the filter output is switched by the PWR switch mounted on the front panel. The PWR
switch is also a circuit breaker that trips if the current exceeds 12.5 amps.

Overvoltage and overcurrent protection are provided by the power circuitry for each output
line. Isolated test points are provided for the incoming battery voltage and the +3.3, +5.0, and
–9.0 V DC outputs. The typical and maximum power consumption for this unit are as
follows:
■ Typical: 28.0 watts

Maximum: 40.5 watts

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 22-3
CHAPTER 22
Power (PWR1) Unit Description
Options

22.5 Options
There are no provisioning options that affect the operation of the PWR1 unit. It is not
necessary to perform any optioning activities when replacing a PWR1 unit.

22.6 Front-Panel Description


Table 22-2 [p. 22-4] lists the LED indicator name, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the PWR1.

Table 22-2: PWR1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

PWR Red Equipment fail No alarm

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test


a
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

Table 22-3 [p. 22-4] lists the test point descriptions for the PWR1.

Table 22-3: PWR1 Test Points

Name Description

+5.0V Test point for +5.0 V DC output (measured against SG)

+3.3V Test point for +3.3 V DC output (measured against SG)

–9.0V Test point for –9.0 V DC output (measured against SG)

SG Signal ground test point

MAIN Test point for measuring input voltage (office battery) (measured against G)

G Ground test point for input voltage

Figure 22-2 [p. 22-5] shows the front panel of the PWR1 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


22-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 22
Power (PWR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

PWR

+5.0V

+3.3V

-9.0V

SG

MAIN
G

PWR

ON

OFF
d7034

PWR1

Figure 22-2: PWR1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 22-5
23
CHAPTERS OC-192 RECEIVER (RCXN)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 23.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
8 DCC1
23.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 23.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 23.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
13 HED1/HED2
23.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 23.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
➤ 23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 23
OC-192 Receiver (RCxn) Unit Description
Overview

23.1 Overview
The Receiver-Composite (RCxn) unit receives the OC-192 optical signal from the network
fiber and converts it to electrical signals. It includes an optical preamplifier that allows optical
input signals to be as low as –22.5 dBm for some units and –19.5 dBm for others.

Table 23-1 [p. 23-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 23-1: RCxn Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

RCx1a FC9511RCx1 Used with 1557 ±2 nm transmitter when not using Dispersion
Compensation Module (DCM)

RCx2 FC9511RCx2 Used with 1557 ±2 nm transmitter when using DCM

RCx3 FC9511RCx3 Used with 1557 ±4 nm transmitter when not using DCM

RCx4 FC9511RCx4 Used with 1557 ±4 nm transmitter when using DCM

RCx6 FC9511RCx6 Used with 1557 ±2 nm transmitter when using DCM for long-reach
applications. Can also be used in ±4 nm applications.
a The “x” indicates optical connector type: F=FC, S=SC, T=ST.

Table 23-2 [p. 23-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 23-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


23-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 23
OC-192 Receiver (RCxn) Unit Description
Features

23.2 Features
The RCxn units have the following features:
■ Optical-to-electrical conversion of the OC-192 signal

On-board optical preamplifier unit
■ Interfaces for optional connection through a Dispersion Compensation Module
(DCM2...8)

23.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the RCxn plug-in unit are as follows:

Width: 68 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

23.4 Functional Description


Figure 23-1 [p. 23-4] is a simplified block diagram of the RCxn unit.

23.4.1 Optical Receiver


The preamplifier subassembly amplifies the 1557-nm optical signal received from the
single-mode fiber (SMF) network connection. The loss of the incoming optical signal results
in the generation of a loss of signal (LOS) alarm signal. The optical output of the preamplifier
connector goes to the input of the optical receiver for the RCx1 and RCx3 units. The optical
output of the preamplifier unit goes to the input of a dispersion compensation unit
(DCM2...8) for the RCx2, RCx4, and RCx6 units.

The optical receiver converts the optical input signal to a 10-Gb/s serial electrical signal. The
loss of this optical signal results in the generation of a failure indication, which is correlated
with the preamplifier indication to determine whether it is an LOS or equipment failure.

Clock recovery circuitry converts the 10-Gb/s signal into sixteen 622-Mb/s signals for use in
the parallel transmission of signals to the DMx1 unit. An alarm is generated if the
phase-locked loop (PLL) circuitry fails within this clock recovery and divider circuitry.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 23-3
CHAPTER 23
OC-192 Receiver (RCxn) Unit Description
Functional Description

Optional DCMx
Interface

Optical Serial To
10 Gb/s Optical to to DMx1
OC-192 Amplifier Electrical Parallel Unit
Converter Converter

LINE
Management
Unit
Complex
Control
Interface
(HUBx)

FAIL/SVCE

PWR A

d7072.fh8_3
Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 23-1: RCxn Unit Simplified Block Diagram

23.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


23-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 23
OC-192 Receiver (RCxn) Unit Description
Options

23.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit.
Table 23-3 [p. 23-5] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 23-3: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


RCx1 32.6 43.9

RCx2 38.8 51.4

RCx3 32.6 43.9

RCx4 38.8 51.4

RCx6 38.8 51.4

23.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the OC-192 optical receiver units are set during
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing an optical receiver unit. Refer to
FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on all
provisioning options.

23.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 23-2 [p. 23-6] shows the front panel of a typical RCxn unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 23-5
CHAPTER 23
OC-192 Receiver (RCxn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors
when uncoupled
AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE
TO BEAM

FAIL/SVCE
LINE

d7023

RCxn

Figure 23-2: RCxn Unit Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


23-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 23
OC-192 Receiver (RCxn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 23-4 [p. 23-7] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the RCxn unit.

Table 23-4: RCxn Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No failure


DC–DC converter fail

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No error

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow

LINE Red L-RDI No SONET alarm


LOS
LOF
L-AIS
BERSF-L
BERSD-L
RFI-Lb (See Caution footnote.)

Yellow Lamp test No lamp test


a
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b
Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream
site relative to this unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 23-7
24
CHAPTERS OC-192 RECEIVER (RSU2)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 24.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
8 DCC1
24.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 24.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 24.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
13 HED1/HED2
24.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 24.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
➤ 24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 24
OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) Unit Description
Overview

24.1 Overview
The OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) unit receives an optical signal from the network fiber over a
range of 1260 to 1608 nm and converts it to an STS-192 electrical signal. The receive level
range is –1.0 dBm to –6.0 dBm. The part number for this unit is FC9511RSU2.

Table 24-1 [p. 24-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 24-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

24.2 Features
The RSU2 units have the following features:

Optical-to-electrical conversion of the OC-192 signal to an STS-192 signal
■ Interfaces for SC, FC, or ST connector types
■ Narrowband application in the range of 1528 to 1565 nm

24.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the RSU2 plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 68 mm
■ Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


24-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 24
OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) Unit Description
Functional Description

24.4 Functional Description


Figure 24-1 [p. 24-3] is a simplified block diagram of the RSU2 unit.

Figure 24-1: RSU2 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

24.4.1 Optical Receiver


The OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) unit receives the 1310- or 1550-nm (range: 1260 to 1608 nm)
optical signal from the network fiber and converts it to an STS-192 electrical signal. The loss
of the incoming optical signal results in the generation of a loss of signal (LOS) alarm signal.

The optical receiver converts the optical input signal to a 10-Gb/s serial electrical signal. The
loss of this optical signal results in the generation of a failure indication, which is correlated
with the preamplifier indication to determine whether it is an LOS or equipment failure.

Clock recovery circuitry converts the 10-Gb/s signal into sixteen 622-Mb/s signals for use in
the parallel transmission of signals to the DMx1 unit. An alarm is generated if the
phase-locked loop (PLL) circuitry fails within this clock recovery and divider circuitry.

24.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 24-3
CHAPTER 24
OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) Unit Description
Options

24.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:
■ Typical: 32.6 watts

Maximum: 43.9 watts

24.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the OC-192 optical receiver units are set during
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing an optical receiver unit. Refer to
FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on all
provisioning options.

24.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 24-2 [p. 24-5] shows the front panel of a typical RSU2 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


24-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 24
OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Figure 24-2: RSU2 Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 24-5
CHAPTER 24
OC-192 Receiver (RSU2) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 24-2 [p. 24-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the RSU2 unit.

Table 24-2: RSU2 Unit LED Indicators

Condition for
Name Color Condition for Activation
Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No failure


DC–DC converter fail

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No error


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow

LINE Red Loss of signal (LOS) No SONET alarm


Loss of frame (LOF)
Demux detector alarm No alarm

Yellow L-AIS (line-alarm indication signal) No alarm


Line-RFI (remote-failure indication)b (See
Caution footnote.) No lamp test
Lamp test
a
Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b
Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream site
relative to this unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


24-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
25
CHAPTERS RCWA (RCA1) RECEIVER
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 25.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
8 DCC1
25.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 25.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 25.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
13 HED1/HED2
25.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 25.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1 25.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
➤ 25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 25
RCWA (RCA1) Receiver Unit Description
Overview

25.1 Overview
The RCWA (RCA1) receiver unit is required when the OC-192 optical signal is received from
the FLASHWAVE® 7100. These wideband receivers cover the spectrum used by the WDM
system, which corresponds to channels 98, 99, and 01 through 39 of the ITU 0.8-nm
(100-GHz) spacing grid. The part number for this unit is FC9511RCA1.

Table 25-1 [p. 25-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 25-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Dense WDM (DWDM) system FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 1.13 [p. 1-32]
features

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

25.2 Features
The RCWA (RCA1) unit has the following features:
■ Optical-to-electrical (O/E) conversion of any OC-192 signal between 1528.77 and
1560.61 nm

On-board optical preamplifier unit

Available with SC, FC, or ST optical connectors

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


25-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 25
RCWA (RCA1) Receiver Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

25.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the RCWA (RCA1) plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 68 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

25.4 Functional Description


Figure 25-1 [p. 25-3] is a simplified block diagram of the RCWA (RCA1) unit.

OPT IN Optical- Serial-


10 Gb/s to- to- To
Optical
OC-192 Electrical Parallel DMx1
SC/FC/ST Amplifier
Converter Converter unit

FAIL/SVCE Unit
Control HUB1
LINE

Converter
Alarm RMV
PWR FAIL
Power

m0091.3
–48 V Power A
Conver ter
–48 V Power B

Figure 25-1: RCWA (RCA1) Unit Simplified Block Diagram

25.4.1 Optical Receiver


The preamplifier subassembly amplifies the 1528.77-nm to 1560.61-nm optical signal
received from the FLASHWAVE 7100 terminal shelf or other compatible WDM product.
Loss of the incoming optical signal generates a loss of signal (LOS) alarm. The optical output
of the preamplifier connector goes to the input of the optical receiver, where the O/E
conversion takes place.

The O/E converter changes the optical input signal to a 10-Gb/s serial electrical signal. Loss
of this optical signal generates a failure indication that is correlated with the preamplifier
indication to determine whether it is an LOS or equipment failure.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 25-3
CHAPTER 25
RCWA (RCA1) Receiver Unit Description
Unit Specifications

Clock recovery circuitry converts the 10-Gb/s signal into a 622-Mb/s signal for use in the
parallel transmission of signals to the DMx1 unit. An alarm is generated if there is a failure of
the circuitry within this clock recovery and divider circuitry.

25.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex HUBx unit (HUB1, HUB2, or HUBU [HUB5]). In addition, this interface accepts
control message inputs from the Management Complex to provision the unit and turn on/off
the LEDs on the front panel.

25.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in that it provides its own power conversion from the office power
inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The typical and
maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 32.6 watts
■ Maximum: 43.9 watts

25.5 Unit Specifications


Table 25-2 [p. 25-4] lists the RCWA (RCA1) unit specifications.

Table 25-2: RCWA (RCA1) Unit Specificationsa

Description RCA1 Notes


Polarization dependent loss (PDL) < 0.1 dB
Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) < 0.1 ps
Device Amplifier + PIN-PD Amplifier specification
Bit rate 9.95328 Gb/s
Signal format NRZ
Receive level range +3.5 dBm to –20.0 dBm
a
x=C, F, or T for SC, FC, or ST type optical connectors.

25.6 Options
All options affecting the OC-192 optical receiver unit operation are set during provisioning
and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. When replacing an optical
receiver unit, no provisioning activities are required. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on all provisioning options.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


25-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 25
RCWA (RCA1) Receiver Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

25.7 Front-Panel Description


Table 25-3 [p. 25-5] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.
Figure 25-2 [p. 25-6] is a typical RCWA (RCA1) unit front panel.

Table 25-3: RCWA (RCA1) Unit LEDs

Condition for
Name Color Condition for Activation
Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No failure


Converter fail, DC-DC

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Polling cell error No error


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow No polling cell Polling cell OK

LINE Red Loss of signal (LOS) No SONET alarm


Loss of frame (LOF)
Demux detector alarm No alarm

Yellow L-AIS (line-alarm indication signal) No alarm


Line-RFI (remote-failure indication)b (See
Caution footnote.) No lamp test
Lamp test
a
Equipment mismatch indicates there is a difference in the type or version between the unit installed in the slot
and the provisioned information for that slot.
b Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream
site relative to this unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 25-5
CHAPTER 25
RCWA (RCA1) Receiver Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Figure 25-2: RCWA (RCA1) Unit Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


25-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
26
CHAPTERS RXWN RECEIVER UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 26.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 26.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
8 DCC1
26.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 26.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 26.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 26.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
15 HUBR (HUB4)
26.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
➤ 26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Overview

26.1 Overview
The RxWn (x=C, F, or T; n=1, 2, 4, 6, 7, or 9) receiver unit is required when the OC-192
optical signal is received from the FLASHWAVE® 7600 wavelength division multiplexing
(WDM) system. These wideband receivers cover the spectrum used by the WDM system,
which corresponds to channels 98, 99, and 01 through 45 of the ITU 0.8-nm (100-GHz)
spacing grid.

Table 26-1 [p. 26-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 26-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Dense WDM (DWDM) system FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 1.13 [p. 1-32]
features

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

26.2 Features
The RxWn unit provides the following features:

Optical-to-electrical (O/E) conversion of any OC-192 signal between 1530 and 1566
nm

On-board optical preamplifier unit

Available with SC, FC, or ST optical connectors

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


26-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

Reference Table 26-2 [p. 26-3] for a list of the RxWn options.

Table 26-2: RxWn Wideband Receiver Units

Unit Conn.
Part Number Fiber Type Spansa Description
Name Type

RCW1 FC9511RCW1 SC SMF ≤4 OC-192 broadband receiver used with the


RFW1 FC9511RFW1 FC FLASHWAVE 7600 WDM system
RTW1 FC9511RTW1 ST Capable of receiving signals from 1535.04 to
1560.61 nm
RCW2 FC9511RCW2 SC NZ-DSF ≤3
RFW2 FC9511RFW2 FC
RTW2 FC9511RTW2 ST

RCW4 FC9511RCW4 SC NZ-DSF ≤6


RFW4 FC9511RFW4 FC
RTW4 FC9511RTW4 ST

RCW6b FC9511RCW6 SC SMF n/a OC-192 broadband receiver used with the
RFW6b FC9511RFW6 FC FLASHWAVE 7100 WDM system
RTW6b FC9511RTW6 ST (blue band receiver)
Capable of receiving signals from 1533.47 to
1541.35 nm

RCW7b FC9511RCW7 SC SMF n/a OC-192 broadband receiver used with the
RFW7b FC9511RFW7 FC FLASHWAVE 7100WDM system
RTW7b FC9511RTW7 ST (red band receiver)
Capable of receiving signals from 1550.92 to
1558.98 nm

RCW9 FC9511RCW9 SC SMF ≤4 OC-192 broadband receiver used with the


RFW9 FC9511RFW9 FC FLASHWAVE 7600 WDM system.
RTW9 FC9511RTW9 ST Capable of receiving signals from 1528.77 to
1565.50 nm
a “Spans” refers to the number of optically amplified spans between the FLASHWAVE terminals. Optical amplification is
accomplished using in-line amplifiers (ILAs). Refer to FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 2.9 [p. 2-143].
b
This unit must be ordered with a fiber connector type specified. The unit will be shipped with an 8-dB attenuator and fiber
jumper. If the RxW6/7 is to be used in a span distance greater than 40 km, the 8-dB attenuator and fiber jumper must be
removed and discarded.

26.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the RxWn plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 68 mm
■ Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 26-3
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Functional Description

26.4 Functional Description


Figure 26-1 [p. 26-4] is a simplified block diagram of the RxW1/2/4/9 units. Figure 26-2
[p. 26-5] is a simplified block diagram of the RxW6/7 units showing the dispersion
compensation ports between the amplifier and O/E converter.

OPT IN Optical- Serial-


10 Gb/s to- to- To
Optical DMx1
OC-192 SC/FC/ST Amplifier Electrical Parallel
Converter Converter unit

FAIL/SVCE Unit
Control HUB1
LINE

Converter
Alarm RMV
PWR FAIL
Power

m0091.3
–48 V Power A
Conver ter
–48 V Power B

Figure 26-1: RxW1/2/4/9 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


26-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Functional Description

Figure 26-2: RxW6/7 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 26-5
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Functional Description

26.4.1 Optical Receiver


The preamplifier subassembly amplifies the 1530-nm to 1566-nm optical signal received
from the FLASHWAVE 7600 Terminal shelf. Loss of the incoming optical signal generates a
loss of signal (LOS) alarm. The optical output of the preamplifier connector goes to the input
of the optical receiver, where the O/E conversion takes place.

The O/E converter changes the optical input signal to a 10-Gb/s serial electrical signal. Loss
of this optical signal generates a failure indication that is correlated with the preamplifier
indication to determine whether it is an LOS or equipment failure.

Clock recovery circuitry converts the 10-Gb/s signal into a 622-Mb/s signal for use in the
parallel transmission of signals to the DMx1 unit. An alarm is generated if there is a failure of
the circuitry within this clock recovery and divider circuitry.

26.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex HUBx unit (HUB1, HUB2, or HUBU [HUB5]). In addition, this interface accepts
control message inputs from the Management Complex to provision the unit and turn on/off
the LEDs on the front panel.

26.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in that it provides its own power conversion from the office power
inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. Table 26-3 [p. 26-6]
lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 26-3: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


RxW1/2/3/4/5/6/7 38.2 50.3

RxW8 32.6 43.9

RxW9 38.2 50.3

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


26-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Unit Specifications

26.5 Unit Specifications


Table 26-4 [p. 26-7] lists the RxWn unit specifications.

Table 26-4: RxWn Unit Specificationsa

Description RxW1/2/4 RxW6 RxW7 RxW9 Notes

Wavelength range (nm) 1535–1561 1533—1542 1550–1559 1528–1566 ITU-T ±0.05

Optical input power –11.8 to +5.0 –18 to 0 –18 to 0 –11.8 to +5.0


(dBm)

Polarization dependent < 0.1


loss (PDL) (dB)

Polarization mode < 0.1


dispersion (PMD) (ps)

Device Ampere + PIN-PD Ampere


specification

Bit rate (Gb/s) 9.95328

Signal format NRZ


a
x=C, F, or T for SC, FC, ST type optical connectors.

26.6 Options
All options affecting the OC-192 optical receiver unit operation are set during provisioning
and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. When replacing an optical
receiver unit, no provisioning activities are required. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on all provisioning options.

26.7 Front-Panel Description


Figure 26-3 [p. 26-8] is a typical RxWn unit front panel.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 26-7
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FC9511RCW1

FAIL/SVCE
LINE

Iss. xx
m0117

RCW1

Figure 26-3: RCW1 Unit Front Panel (Typical of RxWn)

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


26-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 26
RxWn Receiver Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 26-5 [p. 26-9] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation

Table 26-5: RxWn Unit LEDs

Condition for
Name Color Condition for Activation
Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment failure No failure


Converter fail, DC-DC

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Polling cell error No error


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow No polling cell Polling cell OK

LINE Red Loss of signal (LOS) No SONET alarm


Loss of frame (LOF)
Demux detector alarm No alarm

Yellow L-AIS (line-alarm indication signal) No alarm


Line-RFI (remote-failure indication)b
(See Caution footnote.) No lamp test
Lamp test
a Equipment mismatch indicates there is a difference in the type or version between the unit installed in the slot
and the provisioned information for that slot.
b Caution: When the LINE LED is lighted red because of an RFI-L (remote failure indication-line) condition, the
problem is not being caused by this unit. DO NOT PULL THIS UNIT. It only indicates a receiving problem
detected at the site transmitting to this unit. Begin by performing trouble-clearing procedures at the upstream
site relative to this unit.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 26-9
27
CHAPTERS SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL (SCU1)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 27.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
8 DCC1
27.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 27.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 27.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
13 HED1/HED2
27.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 27.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
➤ 27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Overview

27.1 Overview
The Synchronization Control Unit (SCU1) selects and distributes synchronization for the
FLASH®-192 system. Each SCU1 also supplies one derived DS1 output for local timing
distribution. Two SCU1s are used per shelf for equipment protection. When two units are
used, a pair of derived DS1 output signals are available. The part number for this unit is
FC9511SCU1.

Table 27-1 [p. 27-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 27-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

27.2 Features
The SCU1 has the capability to supply the reference for system timing from the following
sources:
■ Building integrated timing supply (BITS) sources
■ Incoming SONET signals

Internal clock (Stratum 3)

Likewise, the source for the derived DS1 outputs used for local timing distribution are
selected from one of the following:
■ BITS sources
■ Incoming SONET signals

Synchronization status messaging (SSM) is used to allow the FLASH-192 system to


automatically select the best timing sources for system timing and derived DS1 outputs from
a list of provisioned references. For an example of a network using SSM, refer to
FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 9. For additional details on
synchronization, including a summary of SSM options, refer to FNC-570-0052-272, System
Operations, Section 1.8.1 [p. 1-65].

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


27-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

The timing inputs and derived DS1 timing outputs can be provisioned as either SF
(superframe) or ESF (extended superframe). The DS1 line buildout (LBO) settings are also
software provisionable.

A “holdover” mode is provided to improve the timing accuracy and stability during any
period when provisioned synchronization references are unavailable.

27.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the SCU1 plug-in unit are as follows:

Width: 18 mm
■ Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

27.4 Functional Description


The simplified block diagram for the SCU1 is shown in Figure 27-1 [p. 27-4]. The functions
of this unit can be categorized as follows:
■ Reference selection
■ Reference distribution
■ Alarming

27.4.1 Reference Selection


Reference selection is made independently for the internal system timing source and for the
external timing output ports. Selection is made from among the following potential timing
sources:

BITS (primary and secondary)
■ Timing signals derived from incoming OC-192, OC-48, OC-12, and OC-3 lines
■ Internal oscillator (Stratum 3)

The SSM feature allows the selection from any or all of the above sources, based on the
synchronization quality level of the signals. This list of possible sources and order of priority is
user-provisionable. When the external BITS signal and derived DS1 signals are formatted as
ESF, synchronization status messages occupy selected bits in the DS1 overhead. These
messages can be read from the incoming BITS signal. Internally generated synchronization
status messages, based on the status of the current clock selection, are inserted into the
outgoing derived DS1 signals.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 27-3
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Functional Description

When a failure is detected on an active reference, the SCU1 automatically goes into holdover
mode and the Management Complex is notified of the failure. Software then analyzes the
quality levels of the provisioned standby references and selects a new reference.

Primary LB Primary/Secondary
BITS SYNCHRONIZATION BITS (DS1)
(DS1) CONTROL
Secondary and
HOLDOVER

Lower Primary Primary


Shelf 1 L-SEL1 DIST To Slave
(DS1) Secondary Upper Shelf
Secondary
(DS1)

Lower Primary 4F-BLSR


Primary
Shelf 2 L-SEL2 SELOUT
(DS1) To Main
Secondary Secondary
Upper Shelf
(DS1)

Slave Primary
Upper U-SEL
Shelf
Secondary System
(DS1) • Clock

• Distribution
(38.88 MHz)

Input from •

Units •

BITS-P

Management BITS-S
Unit
Complex
Control
Interface SYNC
(HUB1 Unit)

FAIL/SVCE

PWR A
d7066.fh8_3

Power
Converter
PWR B To Circuitry

Figure 27-1: SCU1 Simplified Block Diagram

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


27-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Functional Description

When none of the provisioned references is adequate, the SCU1 remains in the holdover
mode until a provisioned reference of sufficient quality is restored. In this mode, the internal
oscillator is controlled by stored timing information, which is based on recent average rates of
the previously selected reference signals. All switches are gradual to prevent sudden changes in
timing reference outputs.

27.4.2 Reference Distribution


Distribution of timing reference signals is divided into two independent functions:

Providing reference timing to FLASH-192 plug-in units that require timing
■ Providing derived DS1 clock outputs for timing other equipment in the office

The system timing reference consists of a 38.88-MHz clock, available to all plug-in units. For
future releases, the system timing will also be available for use by a mate upper shelf in a
4-fiber bidirectional line-switched ring (4F-BLSR) configuration.

The derived DS1 clock output also passes through software-provisionable LBO circuits before
reaching the backplane output connectors.

27.4.3 Alarm and Status


Alarm and status information generated by this unit is manifested in three ways:
■ Control of unit LEDs (Refer to Table 27-2 [p. 27-8] for LED descriptions.)
■ Messages sent to the HUB unit via the HUB polling interface
■ Synchronization status messages inserted into the DS1 derived timing output (ESF
format only)

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 27-5
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Options

27.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 5.0 watts

Maximum: 5.6 watts

27.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the SCU1 are stored in memory in the Management
Complex. It is not necessary to perform any optioning activities when replacing an SCU1.
Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of
the synchronization provisioning options.

For an example of a network using SSM, refer to FNC-570-0052-120, Application


Engineering, Chapter 9. For additional details on synchronization, including a summary of
SSM options, refer to FNC-570-0052-272, System Operations, Section 1.8.1 [p. 1-65].

27.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 27-2 [p. 27-7] shows the front panel of the SCU1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


27-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

P
S
BITS
SYNC
SCU1

d7026

Figure 27-2: SCU1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 27-7
CHAPTER 27
Synchronization Control (SCU1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 27-2 [p. 27-8] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 27-2: SCU1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment alarm Normal operation


DC–DC converter failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No polling errors

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow

SYNC Red All references for system clock or Provisioned references restored
derived DS1 have failed.

Yellow Some references for system clock or Provisioned references restored


derived DS1 have failed.

Lamp test No lamp test

BITS-P Red BITS in LOS–Primary No alarm


BITS in LOF–Primary
BITS in AIS–Primary

Lamp test No lamp test

BITS-S Red BITS in LOS–Secondary No alarm


BITS in LOF–Secondary
BITS in AIS–Secondary

Lamp test No lamp test


a
“Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


27-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
28
CHAPTERS SWITCHING (SWR1) UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 28.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 28.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
8 DCC1
28.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 28.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 28.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 28.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
➤ 28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 28
Switching (SWR1) Unit Description
Overview

28.1 Overview
The Switching (SWR1) unit provides unrestricted time-slot assignment (TSA) of any STS-1
level time slot to any other STS-1 level time slot. The SWR1 unit preserves all SONET and
SDH signal formats: STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c and STM-1, STM-4, and STM-16. The
part number for this unit is FC9511SWR1.

Table 28-1 [p. 28-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 28-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

28.2 Features
The SWR1 provides the following features:
■ Parallel/serial interface for traffic to/from NFR1 units.
■ 768x768 TSA capability
■ Equipment switching

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


28-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 28
Switching (SWR1) Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

28.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the SWR1 plug-in unit are listed in Table 28-2 [p. 28-3].

Table 28-2: SWR1 Plug-In Unit Physical Dimensions

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

18 315 230

■ Width: 18 mm

Height: 315 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

28.4 Functional Description


Eight SWR1 units are required in the Routing shelf. Slots 1–4 contain the units that switch
the working traffic and slots 5–8 contain the units that switch the protect traffic.

28.4.1 Drop Direction Traffic


Data is received from the Transport shelf through the NFR1 units on the left side of the
Routing shelf. NFR1-1 and NFR1-3 carry the working traffic and NFR1-2 and NFR1-4
carry the protect traffic.

Data streams of 32 x 311 Mb/s are received from the NFR1 units and paralleled to 155 Mb/s
through the memory circuit. The paralleled traffic is then sent to the 786TSA circuit for
time-slot assignment. The traffic is then converted to a 311-Mb signal and transmitted to the
appropriate NFR1 unit on the right side of the shelf.

NFR1-5 and NFR1-7 carry the working traffic and NFR1-6 and NFR1-8 carry the protect
traffic between the Routing shelf and the Optical Tributary shelves.

28.4.2 Add Side Traffic


Data is received from the Optical Tributary shelf through the NFR1 units on the right side of
the Routing shelf. Time-slot assignment occurs as described above and the signals are sent to
the appropriate NFR1 units. Hairpin connections are routed back to an Optical Tributary
shelf and add connections to the Transport shelf via the NFR1 units through the right-side or
left-side NFR1 units respectively.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 28-3
CHAPTER 28
Switching (SWR1) Unit Description
Options

28.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:
■ Typical: 22.9 watts

Maximum: 25.3 watts

28.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the SWR1 are set during provisioning and are stored in
memory in the complex management units. It is not necessary to perform any optioning
activities when replacing an SWR1. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring
Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of the switch provisioning options.

28.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 28-1 [p. 28-5] shows the front panel of the SWR1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


28-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 28
Switching (SWR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

SWR1
FC9511SWR1
SNP6SWOXAA k Iss.01
FAIL/SVCE

m0916

Figure 28-1: SWR1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 28-5
CHAPTER 28
Switching (SWR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 28-3 [p. 28-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 28-3: SWR1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment alarm Normal operation


DC/DC converter failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, normal N/A

Yellow Polling cell error No polling errors

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow
a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


28-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
29
CHAPTERS TAU5 UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 29.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 29.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
8 DCC1
29.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 29.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 29.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 29.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
➤ 29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 29
TAU5 Unit Description
Overview

29.1 Overview
The OC-192 Transmitter Amplifier (TAU5) unit provides optical amplification of the optical
signal from a standard narrowband transmitter (TSxn). The part number for this unit is
FC9511TAU5.

Table 29-1 [p. 29-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 29-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing,


Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing,
Chapter 7

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

29.2 Features
The TAU5 unit provides optical amplification of OC-192 signals.

29.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the TAU5 plug-in unit are as follows:

Width: 26 mm

Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

29.4 Functional Description


Figure 29-1 [p. 29-3] is a simplified block diagram of a TAU5 unit.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


29-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 29
TAU5 Unit Description
Functional Description

10 Gb/s
Optical Signal Optical OC-192
from TSxn Amplifier Output

Management
Complex LD SAFETY
Interface Unit
(HUBx) Control

FAIL/SVCE

m0704.fh8_2
PWR A Power
Converter To Circuitry
PWR B

Figure 29-1: TAU5 Unit Simplified Block Diagram

29.4.1 Optical Transmission


The TAU5 unit provides optical amplification of the OC-192 signal for extended range
transmission capability when using TSxn (standard) transmitters. The supported wavelength
range of the TAU5 unit is from 1530.33 nm to 1560.61 nm. The optical transmit level ranges
from a minimum of 7 dBm to a maximum of 9 dBm.

29.4.2 Connector Type


The TAU5 unit uses the user-selectable, universal in-line adapter to allow for in-the-field
connection of the unit. Choices of the adapter include the SC, FC, and ST types. For
information concerning the in-line adapter and its use, refer to FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In
Unit Installation, Chapter 2.

29.4.3 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit and turn on/off the LED on the front panel.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 29-3
CHAPTER 29
TAU5 Unit Description
Options

29.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained. It provides its own power conversion from the office power
inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The typical and
maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 7.0 watts

Maximum: 8.4 watts

29.5 Options
All options affecting TAU5 unit operation are set during provisioning and are stored in
memory in the Management Complex units. When replacing a TAU5 unit, no optioning
activities are required. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations,
Appendix A, for a list of provisioning options.

29.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 29-2 [p. 29-5] shows a TAU5 unit front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


29-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 29
TAU5 Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

LD SAFETY

m0537

Figure 29-2: TAU5 Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 29-5
CHAPTER 29
TAU5 Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 29-2 [p. 29-6] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.

Table 29-2: TAU5 Unit LEDs

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit failure Normal operation

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Installed units match unit


provisioning

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Minor equipment alarm No alarm


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow Unprovisioned by software Provisioned

LD SAFETYb Off Normal Normal operation

Yellow Safety mode: power low/high or Power correct


transmission fiber problem Transmission fiber OK

Lamp test No lamp test


a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b
LD SAFETY LED will light yellow if reflection being received back into the transmitter is too high. When the LD SAFETY
LED is yellow, the port amplifier is shut down to prevent damage downstream. LD SAFETY LED also lights yellow when laser
is disabled by software.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


29-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
30
CHAPTERS TAXN UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 30.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 30.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
8 DCC1
30.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 30.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 30.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 30.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
➤ 30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 30
TAxn Unit Description
Overview

30.1 Overview
The OC-192 Transmitter Amplifier (TAxn) unit provides optical amplification of the optical
signal from a standard transmitter (TSxn). Table 30-1 [p. 30-2] lists the part numbers for
these units.

Table 30-1: Unit Part Numbers

Unit Part Number


TAx1a FC9511TAx1

TAx3a FC9511TAx3

TAx4a FC9511TAx4
a The “x” indicates optical connector type: F=FC, S=SC, T=ST.

Table 30-2 [p. 30-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 30-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

30.2 Features
The TAxn unit provides optical amplification of OC-192 signals.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


30-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 30
TAxn Unit Description
Physical Dimensions

30.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the TAxn plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 26 mm

Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

30.4 Functional Description


Figure 30-1 [p. 30-3] is a simplified block diagram of a TAxn unit.

10 Gb/s
Optical Signal Optical OC-192
from TSxn Amplifier Output

Management
Complex LD SAFETY
Interface Unit
(HUBx) Control

FAIL/SVCE

m0704.fh8_2
PWR A Power
Converter To Circuitry
PWR B

Figure 30-1: TAxn Unit Simplified Block Diagram

30.4.1 Optical Transmission


The TAxn unit provides optical amplification of the OC-192 signal for extended range
transmission capability when using TSxn (standard) transmitters.

30.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit and turn on/off the LED on the front panel.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 30-3
CHAPTER 30
TAxn Unit Description
Options

30.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained. It provides its own power conversion from the office power
inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The typical and
maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 7.0 watts

Maximum: 8.4 watts

30.5 Options
All options affecting TAxn unit operation are set during provisioning and are stored in
memory in the Management Complex units. When replacing a TAxn unit, no optioning
activities are required. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations,
Appendix A, for a list of provisioning options.

30.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 30-2 [p. 30-5] shows a TAxn unit front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


30-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 30
TAxn Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

FAIL/SVCE

LD SAFETY

m0537

Figure 30-2: TAxn Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 30-5
CHAPTER 30
TAxn Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 30-3 [p. 30-6] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.

Table 30-3: TAxn Unit LEDs

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit failure Normal operation

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Installed units match unit


provisioning

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Minor equipment alarm No alarm


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow Unprovisioned by software Provisioned

LD SAFETYb Off Normal Normal operation

Yellow Safety mode: power low/high or Power correct


transmission fiber problem Transmission fiber OK

Lamp test No lamp test


a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
b
LD SAFETY LED will light yellow if reflection being received back into the transmitter is too high. When the
LD SAFETY LED is yellow, the port amplifier is shut down to prevent damage downstream. LD SAFETY LED
also lights yellow when laser is disabled by software.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


30-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
31
CHAPTERS ROUTING SHELF SYNCHRONIZATION
1 Introduction (TCR1) UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 31.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
8 DCC1
31.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 31.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 31.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
13 HED1/HED2
31.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 31.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-4
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
➤ 31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 31
Routing Shelf Synchronization (TCR1) Unit Description
Overview

31.1 Overview
The Routing shelf Synchronization (TCR1) unit provides timing control functionality for the
Routing shelf. The part number for this unit is FC9511TCR1.

Table 31-1 [p. 31-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 31-1: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

31.2 Features
The TCR1 has the capability to supply the reference for system timing from the following
sources:
■ Internal clock
■ Incoming SONET signals

A “holdover” mode is provided to improve timing accuracy and stability during periods when
synchronization references are unavailable.

31.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the TXR1 plug-in unit are as follows:

Width: 20 mm

Height: 315 mm

Depth: 230 mm

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


31-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 31
Routing Shelf Synchronization (TCR1) Unit Description
Functional Description

31.4 Functional Description


The functions of this unit can be categorized as follows:
■ Reference selection

Reference distribution
■ Alarming

31.4.1 Reference Timing Selection


Reference timing selection is made independently for internal Routing shelf timing and
OC-48 traffic from the NFR1 units. Selection is made from the following sources:
■ Internal oscillator
■ Timing signals derived from incoming OC-48 lines (from NFR1)

The selection and priority of the derived timing is not user-provisionable. Selection is made
based on the priority of the NFR1 AIDs (XS-NFR-1 highest, XS-NFR-8 lowest). If a failure is
detected, and the active reference is no longer adequate, the TCR1 unit switches to a holdover
mode and the Management Complex in the OC-192 Transport shelf is notified of the failure.
Software then analyzes the signal quality of provisioned NFR1 units and selects the new
reference.

When no derived NFR1 unit reference is adequate, the TCR1 remains in the holdover mode
until the timing reference from an NFR1 unit reference is of sufficient quality. In this mode,
the internal oscillator provides reference timing signals. The internal oscillator is controlled by
timing information based on recent average rates of the previously selected reference signals.

31.4.2 Reference Distribution


The timing reference signal is distributed to all Routing shelf plug-in units that require
timing.

The system timing reference consists of a 38.88-MHz clock.

31.4.3 Alarm and Status


Alarm and status information generated by the TCR1 unit is manifested in two ways:

Control of unit LEDs (Refer to Table 31-2 [p. 31-6] for LED descriptions.)
■ Messages sent to the HUBR (HUB4) unit via the HUB polling interface

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 31-3
CHAPTER 31
Routing Shelf Synchronization (TCR1) Unit Description
Options

31.4.4 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The
typical and maximum power consumption for this unit are as follows:
■ Typical: 5.8 watts

Maximum: 6.9 watts

31.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the TCR1 are set during provisioning and stored in
memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary to perform any optioning
activities when replacing a TCR1. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring
Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of the synchronization provisioning options.

31.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 31-1 [p. 31-5] shows the front panel of the TCR1.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


31-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 31
Routing Shelf Synchronization (TCR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

TCR1
FC9511TCR1
SNP6TXDCAA k Iss.01
FAIL/SVCE

m0915

Figure 31-1: TCR1 Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 31-5
CHAPTER 31
Routing Shelf Synchronization (TCR1) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 31-2 [p. 31-6] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation.

Table 31-2: TCR1 LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Equipment alarm Normal operation


DC–DC converter failure

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No polling errors

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking No polling cell Polling cell OK


yellow
a Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


31-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
32
CHAPTERS OC-192 TRANSMITTER (TSXN/TCXN)
1 Introduction UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 32.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
8 DCC1
32.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 32.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-3
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 32.5 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
13 HED1/HED2
32.6 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4)
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
➤ 32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 32
OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn/TCxn) Unit Description
Overview

32.1 Overview
The OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn and TCxn) units convert the electrical STS-192 SONET
signal into an optical signal and have the option to provide additional amplification for
extended range (153 km) transmission capability.

Table 32-1 [p. 32-2] lists the versions of this unit covered in this Unit Description.

Table 32-1: Transmitter Unit Versions

Unit Name Part Number Description

TSx1a FC9511TSx1 OC-192 transmitter at 1557 ±2 nm (without Dispersion Compensation Module


(DCM) ports)

TSx2a FC9511TSx2 OC-192 transmitter at 1557 ±4 nm (without DCM ports)

TCx7a FC9511TCx7 OC-192 transmitter with postamplifier at 1557 ±2 nm (with DCM ports)

TCx8a FC9511TCx8 OC-192 transmitter with postamplifier at 1557 ±4 nm (with DCM ports)

TCx9a FC9511TCx9 OC-192 transmitter used at 1557 ±2 nm with DCM for long-reach applications
(with DCM ports)
a The “x” indicates optical connector type: F=FC, S=SC, T=ST.

Table 32-2 [p. 32-2] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 32-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


32-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 32
OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn/TCxn) Unit Description
Features

32.2 Features
The TSxn/TCxn units have the following features:
■ Electrical-to-optical conversion of the OC-192 signal

Optional, on-board optical amplifier unit
■ Composite (TC) units that provide interfaces for optional connection through a
DCMn

32.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the TSxn/TCxn plug-in unit are listed in Table 32-3 [p. 32-3].

Table 32-3: TSxn/TCxn Plug-In Units Physical Dimensions

Height Depth
Name Width (mm)
(mm) (mm)

TSx1/2 48 265 230

TCx7/8/9 74 265 230

■ Width: 20 mm
■ Height: 265 mm
■ Depth: 230 mm

32.4 Functional Description


Figure 32-1 [p. 32-4] is a simplified block diagram of the TSxn or TCxn unit. The optional
amplifier is also shown.

32.4.1 Optical Transmission


The TSxn or TCxn unit provides the electrical-to-optical conversion of the OC-192 signal for
transmission into the network. The standard transmitter (TSxn) is a transmitter only. The
composite transmitter (TCxn) consists of a transmitter and postamplifier.

The parallel data from the MXx1 unit is converted to a serial signal. This electrical signal is
then converted to an optical signal by modulating the output of a laser. On composite units,
the optical signal is either sent directly to the optical amplifier or is connected through a
DCMn if needed. Optical amplification of the laser output is provided by the composite
units.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 32-3
CHAPTER 32
OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn/TCxn) Unit Description
Functional Description

Figure 32-1: TSxn or TCxn Unit Simplified Block Diagram

Optical reflection detection circuitry, which detects the uncoupling of the line fiber from the
output connector, is built into the optical amplifier on the TCxn units. The output power of
the unit is then automatically decreased to a safe level.

32.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit, operate protection switching circuitry, and turn on/off the
indicator LEDs on the front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


32-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 32
OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn/TCxn) Unit Description
Options

32.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained in the sense that it provides its own power conversion from the
office power inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit.
Table 32-4 [p. 32-5] lists the typical and maximum power consumption for these units.

Table 32-4: Power Consumption (Watts)

Unit Typical Maximum


TSx1/2 38.4 73.6

TCx7/8/9 52.4 43.9

32.5 Options
All options affecting the operation of the OC-192 optical transmitter units are set during
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. It is not necessary
to perform any optioning activities when replacing an optical transmitter unit. Refer to
FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for details on
provisioning options.

32.6 Front-Panel Description


Figure 32-2 [p. 32-6] shows the front panels typical of the TSxn/TCxn units.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 32-5
CHAPTER 32
OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn/TCxn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

DANGER
Invisible laser DANGER
radiation from Invisible laser
connectors radiation from
when uncoupled
AVOID DIRECT
connectors
EXPOSURE when uncoupled
TO BEAM AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE
TO BEAM

FAIL/SVCE

FAIL/SVCE
LD SAFETY
d7022

d7471

TSxn TCxn

Figure 32-2: TSxn and TCxn Unit Front Panels

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


32-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 32
OC-192 Transmitter (TSxn/TCxn) Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 32-5 [p. 32-7] lists the LED indicator names, colors, and causes of activation and
deactivation for the TSxn or TCxn unit.

Table 32-5: TSxn or TCxn Unit LED Indicators

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Laser alarma No failure


DC–DC converter fail

DCM fiber connections not correctb Check DCM fiber connections

Blinking red Equipment mismatchc Equipment match

Green In service, active In service, standby/OOS

Yellow Polling cell error No poll cell error

Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow No polling cell Poll OK

LD SAFETYd Off Normal Normal operation


(TCxn units
only) Yellow Safety mode: power low/high or Power correct
transmission fiber problem Transmission fiber OK

Lamp test No lamp test


a
Laser temperature, laser current
b
Only valid for TCxn units
c Equipment mismatch indicates the provisioned information and the unit installed in the slot do not match.
d
LD SAFETY LED will light yellow if reflection being received back into the transmitter is too high. When the LD SAFETY
LED is yellow, the port amplifier is shut down to prevent damage downstream.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 32-7
33
CHAPTERS TSNN/TFNN/TTNN UNIT DESCRIPTION
1 Introduction
2 3xx1 This chapter includes the following sections:
3 AWU1
4 C2x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
5 C8x1 33.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 33.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
8 DCC1
33.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 33.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-6
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 33.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-7
13 HED1/HED2
14 HED3 33.6 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
15 HUBR (HUB4)
33.7 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
16 HUBx
17 MEM1
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
➤ 33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Overview

33.1 Overview
The OC-192 transmitter unit (TSnn, TFnn, or /TTnn) converts the electrical STS-192
SONET signal into an ITU-compliant optical signal that is compatible with the Fujitsu
Network Communication Inc. (FNC) FLASHWAVE® 7600 and FLASHWAVE 7100
wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) systems. There are 47 units in this series and their
output wavelengths correspond to the ITU 0.8-nm (100-GHz) spacing standard—ITU
channels 98, 99, and 01 through 45.

Note: For information about TSnn units (Issue 6 or later) with tunable lasers, refer to Chapter 34
of this practice.

Table 33-1 [p. 33-2] lists the TSnn unit (SC optical connector) versions covered in this Unit
Description.

Table 33-1: TSnn Transmitter Unit Versions

Nominal
Wavelength
Unit Name Part Number Center Freq
(nm)
(THz)

TS98 FC9511TS98 1528.77 196.1

TS99 FC9511TS99 1529.56 196.0

TS01 FC9511TS01 1530.33 195.9

TS02 FC9511TS02 1531.12 195.8

TS03 FC9511TS03 1531.90 195.7

TS04 FC9511TS04 1532.68 195.6

TS05 FC9511TS05 1533.47 195.5

TS06 FC9511TS06 1534.25 195.4

TS07 FC9511TS07 1535.04 195.3

TS08 FC9511TS08 1535.82 195.2

TS09 FC9511TS09 1536.61 195.1

TS10 FC9511TS10 1537.40 195.0

TS11 FC9511TS11 1538.19 194.9

TS12 FC9511TS12 1538.98 194.8

TS13 FC9511TS13 1539.77 194.7

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


33-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Overview

Table 33-1: TSnn Transmitter Unit Versions (Cont.)

Nominal
Wavelength
Unit Name Part Number Center Freq
(nm)
(THz)

TS14 FC9511TS14 1540.56 194.6

TS15 FC9511TS15 1541.35 194.5

TS16 FC9511TS16 1542.14 194.4

TS17 FC9511TS17 1542.94 194.3

TS18 FC9511TS18 1543.73 194.2

TS19 FC9511TS19 1544.53 194.1

TS20 FC9511TS20 1545.32 194.0

TS21 FC9511TS21 1546.12 193.9

TS22 FC9511TS22 1546.92 193.8

TS23 FC9511TS23 1547.72 193.7

TS24 FC9511TS24 1548.51 193.6

TS25 FC9511TS25 1549.32 193.5

TS26 FC9511TS26 1550.12 193.4

TS27 FC9511TS27 1550.92 193.3

TS28 FC9511TS28 1551.72 193.2

TS29 FC9511TS29 1552.52 193.1

TS30 FC9511TS30 1553.33 193.0

TS31 FC9511TS31 1554.13 192.9

TS32 FC9511TS32 1554.94 192.8

TS33 FC9511TS33 1555.75 192.7

TS34 FC9511TS34 1556.55 192.6

TS35 FC9511TS35 1557.36 192.5

TS36 FC9511TS36 1558.17 192.4

TS37 FC9511TS37 1558.98 192.3

TS38 FC9511TS38 1559.79 192.2

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 33-3
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Overview

Table 33-1: TSnn Transmitter Unit Versions (Cont.)

Nominal
Wavelength
Unit Name Part Number Center Freq
(nm)
(THz)

TS39 FC9511TS39 1560.61 192.1

TS40 FC9511TS40 1561.42 192.0

TS41 FC9511TS41 1562.23 191.9

TS42 FC9511TS42 1563.05 191.8

TS43 FC9511TS43 1563.86 191.7

TS44 FC9511TS44 1564.68 191.6

TS45 FC9511TS45 1565.50 191.5

For all units listed in Table 33-1 [p. 33-2], there are options for the optical connector type.
These are listed in Table 33-2 [p. 33-4].

Table 33-2: Txnn Transmitter Unit Versions—Optical Connector Options

Unit
Part Numbera Conn. Type Description
Name

TSnn FC9511TSnn SC OC-192 transmitter for WDM single-mode fiber


(SMF) applications
TFnn FC9511TFnn FC

TTnn FC9511TTnn ST
a nn = 01...45, 98, 99

Table 33-3 [p. 33-4] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 33-3: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Dense WDM (DWDM) system FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 1.13 [p. 1-32]
features

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


33-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Features

Table 33-3: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference (Cont.)

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

33.2 Features
The TSnn units have the following features:
■ Electrical-to-optical conversion (E/O) of the OC-192 signal
■ ITU-compliant 0.8 nm-spaced wavelength optical output

33.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the TSnn plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 48 mm
■ Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 33-5
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Functional Description

33.4 Functional Description


Figure 33-1 [p. 33-6] is a simplified block diagram of the TSnn unit.

Signal Parallel-to-Serial Electrical-to-Optical Wavelength 10 Gb/s


from Converter Converter Locker OC-192
MXx1 SC/FC/ST Narrowband
Output

Management
Complex
FAIL/SVCE Unit Control Interface
(HUBx Unit)
Converter
Alarm RMV
PWR FAIL

m0092.fh8_2
Power
Converter -48V Power A

-48V Power B

Figure 33-1: TSnn Unit Simplified Block Diagram

33.4.1 Optical Transmission


The TSnn unit provides the E/O conversion of the OC-192 signal for transmission to the
FLASHWAVE 7600 WDM system.

The parallel data from the MXx1 unit is converted to a serial signal. This electrical signal is
then converted to an optical signal by modulating the output of a laser. The center wavelength
of the optical signal is monitored by the wavelength locking circuit. A feedback loop to the E/
O converter is used to prevent the signal from drifting off frequency.

33.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit and turn on/off the LED on the front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


33-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Unit Specifications

33.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained. It provides its own power conversion from the office power
inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The typical and
maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 38.4 watts

Maximum: 62.5 watts

33.5 Unit Specifications


Table 33-4 [p. 33-7] lists the TSnn unit specifications.

Table 33-4: TSnn Unit Specifications

Specifications
Description Units
TSnn

System gain, SMF, ≤ 4 spans 23.0 dBm/ch/span

System gain, non-zero NZ DSF, TrueWave® N/A


≤ 6 spans dBm/ch
LEAF® N/A

Optical source (DFB-LD) Laser diode output power > +7.5 dBm

RIN < –140 dB/Hz

Sidemode suppression > 35 dB

Wavelength locker Insertion loss < 2.0 dB

Wavelength stability < ±0.05 nm

Locking speed < 40 Second

Modulator (LN-external mod) Modulation format NRZ

Duty 1

Bit rate 9.95328 Gb/s

Alpha parameter +1

Insertion loss < 7.5 dB

Output power > –2.6 to 4.4 dBm

Output waveform Pulse mask

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 33-7
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Options

Table 33-4: TSnn Unit Specifications (Cont.)

Specifications
Description Units
TSnn

Extinction ratio ≥ 13 (TSnn) dB

Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) < 0.2 ps

33.6 Options
All options affecting TSnn unit operation are set during provisioning and are stored in
memory in the Management Complex units. When replacing a TSnn unit, no optioning
activities are required. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System Turn-Up Ring Configurations,
Appendix A, for a list of provisioning options.

33.7 Front-Panel Description


Figure 33-2 [p. 33-9] shows the TSnn unit front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


33-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

TSnn
TS98
TS99
TS01
TS02
TS03
FC9511TSnn TS04
TS05
TS06
TS07
TS08
TS09
TS10
FAIL/SVCE TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS20
TS21
TS22
TS23
TS24
TS25
TS26
TS27
TS28
TS29
TS30
TS31
TS32
TS33
Iss. xx
TS34
TS35
TS36
TS37
TS38
TS39
TS40
TS41
TS42
m0880.fh8_4

TS43
TS44
TSnn
TS45

Figure 33-2: TSnn Unit Front Panel

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 33-9
CHAPTER 33
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 33-5 [p. 33-10] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.

Table 33-5: TSnn Unit LEDs

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit failure Normal operation


Wavelength out of lock Normal operation

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Installed units match unit


provisioning

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Unprovisioned by software Provisioned


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow Polling cell error Polling OK


a
Equipment mismatch indicates there is a difference in the type or version between the unit installed in the slot
and the provisioned information for that slot.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


33-10 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
34
CHAPTERS TSNN (ISSUE 6 OR LATER) NARROWBAND
1 Introduction TUNABLE TRANSMITTER UNIT DESCRIPTION
2 3xx1
3 AWU1
This chapter includes the following sections:
4 C2x1
5 C8x1 NO. SECTION PAGE
6 CPU1
7 CRF1 34.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
8 DCC1
34.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
9 DCMx
10 DMR1/DMS1/DMS2 34.3 Physical Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
11 FAN1/FAN3
12 FAN2/FAN4 34.4 Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6
13 HED1/HED2
34.5 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-7
14 HED3
15 HUBR (HUB4) 34.6 Using In-Line Optical Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-8
16 HUBx
17 MEM1 34.7 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-8
18 MMx1/MSxn/MMnn
19 MMx5/MSx5 34.8 Front-Panel Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-9
20 MXR1, MXS1, MXS2
21 NFR1
22 PWR1
23 RCxn
24 RSU2
25 RCWA (RCA1)
26 RxWn
27 SCU1
28 SWR1
29 TAU5
30 TAxn
31 TCR1
32 TSxn/TCxn
33 TSnn/TFnn/
TTnn
➤ 34 TSnn

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Overview

34.1 Overview
The OC-192 narrowband tunable transmitter unit (TSnn, Issue 6 or later) converts the
electrical STS-192 SONET signal into a narrowband optical signal that is compatible with
wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) systems. The output wavelengths correspond to
the ITU 0.8 nm (100 GHz) spacing standard.

Note: For information about TSnn units (prior to Issue 6) without tunable lasers, refer to
Chapter 33 of this practice.

For the TSnn narrowband tunable transmitter units, four customer-selectable frequencies are
contained on each unit. In the initial deployment of these units, tuning was achieved by
setting dip switches located on the PCB. With Release 5.2, the frequency selection is software
controlled. The software setting overrides the dip switch setting.

Table 34-1 [p. 34-3] lists the TSnn narrowband tunable transmitter unit versions covered in
this Unit Description. An optical connector adapter kit is required for these units (refer to
FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Table 2-6 [p. 2-15]).

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


34-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Overview

Table 34-1: TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Versions

Nominal
Wavelength
Unit Name Part Number Center Freq
(nm)
(THz)

TS98 FC9511TS98-I06 1528.77 196.1

1529.56 196.0

1530.33 195.9

1531.12 195.8

TS03 FC9511TS03-I06 1531.90 195.7

1532.68 195.6

1533.47 195.5

1534.25 195.4

TS07 FC9511TS07-I06 1535.04 195.3

1535.82 195.2

1536.61 195.1

1537.40 195.0

TS11 FC9511TS11-I06 1538.19 194.9

1538.98 194.8

1539.77 194.7

1540.56 194.6

TS15 FC9511TS15-I06 1541.35 194.5

1542.14 194.4

1542.94 194.3

1543.73 194.2

TS19 FC9511TS19-I06 1544.53 194.1

1545.32 194.0

1546.12 193.9

1546.92 193.8

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 34-3
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Overview

Table 34-1: TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Versions (Cont.)

Nominal
Wavelength
Unit Name Part Number Center Freq
(nm)
(THz)

TS23 FC9511TS23-I06 1547.72 193.7

1548.51 193.6

1549.32 193.5

1550.12 193.4

TS27 FC9511TS27-I06 1550.92 193.3

1551.72 193.2

1552.52 193.1

1553.33 193.0

TS31 FC9511TS31-I06 1554.13 192.9

1554.94 192.8

1555.75 192.7

1556.55 192.6

TS35 FC9511TS35-I06 1557.36 192.5

1558.17 192.4

1558.98 192.3

1559.79 192.2

TS39 FC9511TS39-I06 1560.61 192.1

1561.42 192.0

1562.23 191.9

1563.05 191.8

TS43 FC9511TS43-I06 1563.86 191.7

1564.68 191.6

1565.50 191.5

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


34-4 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Features

Table 34-2 [p. 34-5] lists cross-references for additional information on this unit.

Table 34-2: Additional Unit Information Cross-Reference

Unit Information Cross-Reference

Part number/ordering FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Chapter 2

Dense WDM (DWDM) system FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Section 1.13 [p. 1-32]
features

Compatibility FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 4

Optical specifications FNC-570-0052-120, Application Engineering, Chapter 7

Installation/removal procedures FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2

Optical connectors location FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Appendix B

Replacement procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 6

Optical power level measurement FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing, Chapter 7
procedures

Trouble-clearing procedures FNC-570-0052-480, Maintenance and Trouble Clearing

34.2 Features
The TSnn narrowband tunable transmitter units have the following features:
■ Electrical-to-optical conversion (E/O) of the OC-192 signal
■ Narrowband optical output
■ Ability to select one of four wavelengths, thereby eliminating many unit/connector
type configurations
■ Customer-selectable, in-line optical adapter types (SC, FC, or ST) for fiber
connections (refer to FNC-570-0052-170, Ordering Information, Table 2-6 [p. 2-15]
for the optical connector adapter kits)

34.3 Physical Dimensions


The physical dimensions of the TSnn plug-in unit are as follows:
■ Width: 36 mm

Height: 265 mm

Depth: 230 mm

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 34-5
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Functional Description

34.4 Functional Description


Figure 34-1 [p. 34-6] is a simplified block diagram of the TSnn narrowband tunable
transmitter unit.

Signal Parallel-to-Serial Electrical-to-Optical Wavelength 10 Gb/s


from Converter Locker OC-192
MXx1 Converter Narrowband
SC/FC/ST
Output

Management
Complex
FAIL/SVCE Unit Control
Interface
(HUBx Unit)
Converter
Alarm RMV
PWR FAIL

m0092.fh8_2
Power
Converter -48V Power A

-48V Power B

Figure 34-1: TSnn Unit Simplified Block Diagram

34.4.1 Optical Transmission


The TSnn narrowband tunable transmitter unit provides the electrical-to-optical conversion
of the OC-192 signal for transmission to the FLASHWAVE® 320G WDM system, the
FLASHWAVE 7100 (formerly FLASHWAVE METRO) system, or other DWDM systems.

The parallel data from the MXx1 or MSx1 unit is converted to a serial signal. This electrical
signal is then converted to an optical signal by modulating the output of a laser. The center
wavelength of the optical signal is monitored by the wavelength locking circuit. A feedback
loop to the E/O converter is used to prevent the signal from drifting off frequency.

34.4.2 Monitor and Control


Unit control interface is provided to report circuit and signal failures to the Management
Complex. In addition, this interface accepts control message inputs from the Management
Complex to provision the unit and turn on/off the LED on the front panel.

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


34-6 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Unit Specifications

34.4.3 Unit Power


Each unit is self-contained. It provides its own power conversion from the office power
inputs. Both A and B office power and returns are accepted into the unit. The typical and
maximum power consumption for these units are as follows:
■ Typical: 38.4 watts

Maximum: 62.5 watts

34.5 Unit Specifications


Table 34-3 [p. 34-7] lists the unit specifications.

Table 34-3: TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Specifications

Description Specifications

System gain, SMF, ≤ 4 spans 23.0 dBm/ch/span

Optical source (DFB-LD) Laser diode output power > +7.5 dBm

RIN < –140 dB/Hz

Sidemode suppression > 35 dBm

Wavelength locker Insertion loss < 2.0 dB

Wavelength stability < ±0.05 nm

Locking speed < 40 seconds

Modulator (LN-external mod) Modulation format NRZ

Duty 1

Bit rate 9.95328 Gb/s

Alpha parameter +1

Insertion loss < 7.5 dB

Output power > –2.6 to 4.4 dBm

Output waveform Pulse mask

Extinction ratio ? 12 dB

Polarization mode dispersion (PMD) < 0.2 ps

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 34-7
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Using In-Line Optical Adapters

34.6 Using In-Line Optical Adapters


Table 34-4 [p. 34-8] lists the in-line optical adapter kits that allow the TSnn tunable
transmitter units to support fiber connectors of type SC, FC, or ST. Refer to
FNC-570-0052-220, Plug-In Unit Installation, Chapter 2, for instructions for the use of these
adapters.

Table 34-4: Optical Adapter Kits

Connector
Kit Part Number Description Requirements
Type

SC HA15B-0001-E001 SC connectors for the transmitter Required: 1 kit for each


universal optical adapters. The kit transmitter unit equipped
contains 2 connectors, instructions, with an optical adapter
and removal tool.

FC HA15B-0001-E002 FC connectors for the transmitter Required: 1 kit for each


universal optical adapters. The kit transmitter unit equipped
contains 2 connectors, instructions, with an optical adapter
and removal tool.

ST HA15B-0001-E003 ST connectors for the transmitter Required: 1 kit for each


universal optical adapters. The kit transmitter unit equipped
contains 2 connectors, instructions, with an optical adapter
and removal tool.

34.7 Options
All options affecting TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter unit operation are set during
provisioning and are stored in memory in the Management Complex units. When replacing a
TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter unit, the desired wavelength is selected by setting two
DIP switches on the PCB. Table 34-5 [p. 34-8] lists the DIP switch settings used to select one
of the four wavelengths provided by the unit. See Figure 34-2 [p. 34-9] for the locations of the
DIP switches on the TSnn tunable transmitter unit. Refer to FNC-570-0052-270, System
Turn-Up Ring Configurations, Appendix A, for a list of provisioning options.

Table 34-5: DIP Switch Settings for Tunable Lasers

DIP Switch 1 DIP Switch 2 Wavelength Setting

0 0 Lowest wavelength (default setting)

1 0 Low intermediate wavelength

0 1 High intermediate wavelength

1 1 Highest wavelength

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


34-8 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Figure 34-2: TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter DIP Switches for Setting Unit Wavelength

34.8 Front-Panel Description


Figure 34-3 [p. 34-10] shows the TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter unit front panel.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 34-9
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Figure 34-3: TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Front Panel

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


34-10 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
CHAPTER 34
TSnn (Issue 6 or Later) Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit Description
Front-Panel Description

Table 34-6 [p. 34-11] lists the LED names, colors, and causes of activation and deactivation.

Table 34-6: TSnn Narrowband Tunable Transmitter Unit LEDs

Name Color Condition for Activation Condition for Deactivation

FAIL/SVCE Red Unit failure Normal operation


Wavelength out of lock Normal operation

Blinking red Equipment mismatcha Installed units match unit


provisioning

Green In service, active In service, standby

Yellow Unprovisioned by software Provisioned


Lamp test No lamp test

Blinking yellow Polling cell error Polling OK


a
Mismatch indicates there is a difference in the type or version between the unit installed in the slot and the
provisioned information for that slot.

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions 34-11
Index

NUMERICS unit description 9-1


demultiplexing 10-3
3xx1
unit description 2-1 dispersion compensation module
DCMx 9-2
DMR1
A unit description 10-1
DMS1
AWU1 unit description 10-1
unit description 3-1
DMS2
unit description 10-1
C
C2x1
F
unit description 4-1
FAN1/FAN3
C8x1 unit description 11-1
unit description 5-1
FAN2/FAN4
cooling fans 11-1, 12-1 unit description 12-1
CPU1
unit description 6-1
H
craft interface
unit 7-2
HED1/HED2
CRF1 unit description 13-1
unit description 7-1
HED3
unit description 14-1
D housekeeping
AWU1 3-5
data communication channel unit 8-2 HUBR (HUB4)
DCC1 unit description 15-1
unit description 8-1 HUBx
DCMx switch locations 16-7

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions
Index

unit description 16-1 receiver


RCxn 23-1
RSU2 24-1
M RxA1 25-1
RxWn (wideband) 26-1
transmitter
MEM1
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn 33-1
unit description 17-1
TSxn/TCxn 32-1
memory tunable transmitter (TSnn) 34-1
unit 17-1
OC-48
MMx1 interface 5-3, 19-1
unit description 18-1 MMx1 18-1
NFR1 21-1
MMx5
unit description 19-1 OC-48c
interface 19-1
MMxx
unit description 18-1 orderwire
unit versions 18-3 AWU1 3-5
MSx5
unit description 19-1
P
MSxn
unit description 18-1
power
multiplexing 20-3 converter 22-1
MXR1 processor, CPU 6-2
unit description 20-1
PWR1
MXS1 unit description 22-1
unit description 20-1
MXS2
unit description 20-1 R
RCxn
N unit description 23-1
unit versions 23-2
NFR1 routing shelf
unit description 21-1 sync unit features 31-2
RSU2
unit description 24-1
O
RxA1
unit description 25-1
OC-12
interface 4-2 RxWn
unit description 26-1
OC-192
wideband receiver units 26-3

FLASH-192 Release 5.2 FNC-570-0052-000


I-2 Unit Descriptions FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Issue 3, March 2005
Index

S U
SCU1 unit description
unit description 27-1 10-Gb/z demultiplexer (DMR1/DMS1/DMS2) 10-1
alarm/orderwire (AWU1) 3-1
SMF (single mode fiber)
craft interface (CRF1) 7-1
dispersion compensation 9-2
data communications channel (DCC1) 8-1
subtending ring dispersion compensation (DCMx) 9-1
MxS2 unit 18-2 FAN1/FAN3 11-1
FAN2/FAN4 12-1
switching unit (SWR1) 28-1
flash memory (MEM1) 17-1
synchronization HUBR (HUB4) 15-1
control unit 27-1 HUBx 16-1
reference selection 27-3 introduction 1-2
routing shelf unit 31-1 microprocessor (CPU1) 6-1
multiplexer (MXR1/MXS1/MXS2) 20-1
OC-12 interface (C2x1) 4-1
T OC-192 receiver
(RCxn) 23-1
(RSU2) 24-1
TAU5
OC-3 interface (3xx1) 2-1
unit description 29-1
OC-48 interface
TAxn (C8x1) 5-1
unit description 30-1 (MMx1/MMxx/MSxn) 18-1
(MMx5/MSx5) 19-1
TCR1
(NFR1) 21-1
unit description 31-1
optical receiver
TCxn (RxA1) 25-1
unit description 32-1 (RxWn) 26-1
overhead processing
testing
(HED1/HED2) 13-1
points, power 22-4
(HED3) 14-1
timing power (PWR1) 22-1
unit, SCU1 unit description 27-1 routing shelf sync (TCR1) 31-1
TSnn switching (SWR1) 28-1
unit description 34-1 synchronization control (SCU1) 27-1
versions 34-3 transmitter
(TSnn/TFnn/TTnn) 33-1
TSnn/TFnn/TTnn (TSxn/TCxn) 32-1
optical connector options 33-4 transmitter/amplifier
unit description 33-1 (TAU5) 29-1
versions 33-2 (TAxn) 30-1
TSxn tunable, narrowband transmitter (TSnn) 34-1
unit description 32-1

FNC-570-0052-000 FLASH-192 Release 5.2


Issue 3, March 2005 FNC and FNC Customer Use Only Unit Descriptions I-3

You might also like